USRE42375E1 - Quinoxalinyl macrocyclic hepatitis C serine protease inhibitors - Google Patents

Quinoxalinyl macrocyclic hepatitis C serine protease inhibitors Download PDF

Info

Publication number
USRE42375E1
USRE42375E1 US12/069,553 US6955308A USRE42375E US RE42375 E1 USRE42375 E1 US RE42375E1 US 6955308 A US6955308 A US 6955308A US RE42375 E USRE42375 E US RE42375E
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
absent
compound
hydrogen
formula
carbon atoms
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Active, expires
Application number
US12/069,553
Inventor
Suanne Nakajima
Zhenwei Miao
Ying Sun
Datong Tang
Guoyou Xu
Brian Porter
Yat Sun Or
Zhe Wang
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Enanta Pharmaceuticals Inc
Original Assignee
Enanta Pharmaceuticals Inc
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Enanta Pharmaceuticals Inc filed Critical Enanta Pharmaceuticals Inc
Priority to US12/069,553 priority Critical patent/USRE42375E1/en
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of USRE42375E1 publication Critical patent/USRE42375E1/en
Active legal-status Critical Current
Adjusted expiration legal-status Critical

Links

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07KPEPTIDES
    • C07K5/00Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof
    • C07K5/04Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof containing only normal peptide links
    • C07K5/08Tripeptides
    • C07K5/0802Tripeptides with the first amino acid being neutral
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K38/00Medicinal preparations containing peptides
    • A61K38/16Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof
    • A61K38/17Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from animals; from humans
    • A61K38/19Cytokines; Lymphokines; Interferons
    • A61K38/21Interferons [IFN]
    • A61K38/212IFN-alpha
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K38/00Medicinal preparations containing peptides
    • A61K38/16Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof
    • A61K38/17Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from animals; from humans
    • A61K38/19Cytokines; Lymphokines; Interferons
    • A61K38/21Interferons [IFN]
    • A61K38/215IFN-beta
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P31/00Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
    • A61P31/12Antivirals
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P31/00Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
    • A61P31/12Antivirals
    • A61P31/14Antivirals for RNA viruses
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D487/00Heterocyclic compounds containing nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D477/00
    • C07D487/02Heterocyclic compounds containing nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D477/00 in which the condensed system contains two hetero rings
    • C07D487/04Ortho-condensed systems
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07KPEPTIDES
    • C07K5/00Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof
    • C07K5/04Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof containing only normal peptide links
    • C07K5/08Tripeptides
    • C07K5/0802Tripeptides with the first amino acid being neutral
    • C07K5/0804Tripeptides with the first amino acid being neutral and aliphatic

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to novel macrocycles having activity against the hepatitis C virus (HCV) and useful in the treatment of HCV infections. More particularly, the invention relates to macrocyclic compounds, compositions containing such compounds and methods for using the same, as well as processes for making such compounds.
  • HCV hepatitis C virus
  • HCV is the principal cause of non-A, non-B hepatitis and is an increasingly severe public health problem both in the developed and developing world. It is estimated that the virus infects over 200 million people worldwide, surpassing the number of individuals infected with the human immunodeficiency virus (HIV) by nearly five fold. HCV infected patients, due to the high percentage of individuals inflicted with chronic infections, are at an elevated risk of developing cirrhosis of the liver, subsequent hepatocellular carcinoma and terminal liver disease. HCV is the most prevalent cause of hepatocellular cancer and cause of patients requiring liver transplantations in the western world.
  • HIV human immunodeficiency virus
  • anti-HCV therapeutics There are considerable barriers to the development of anti-HCV therapeutics, which include, but are not limited to, the persistence of the virus, the genetic diversity of the virus during replication in the host, the high incident rate of the virus developing drug-resistant mutants, and the lack of reproducible infectious culture systems and small-animal models for HCV replication and pathogenesis. In a majority of cases, given the mild course of the infection and the complex biology of the liver, careful consideration must be given to antiviral drugs, which are likely to have significant side effects.
  • NS3 hepatitis C non-structural protein-3
  • HCV is a flaviridae type RNA virus.
  • the HCV genome is enveloped and contains a single strand RNA molecule composed of circa 9600 base pairs. It encodes a polypeptide comprised of approximately 3010 amino acids.
  • the HCV polyprotein is processed by viral and host peptidase into 10 discreet peptides which serve a variety of functions.
  • the P7 protein is of unknown function and is comprised of a highly variable sequence.
  • NS2 is a zinc-dependent metalloproteinase that functions in conjunction with a portion of the NS3 protein.
  • NS3 incorporates two catalytic functions (separate from its association with NS2): a serine protease at the N-terminal end, which requires NS4A as a cofactor, and an ATP-ase-dependent helicase function at the carboxyl terminus.
  • NS4A is a tightly associated but non-covalent cofactor of the serine protease.
  • the NS3.4A protease is responsible for cleaving four sites on the viral polyprotein.
  • the NS3-NS4A cleavage is autocatalytic, occurring in cis.
  • the remaining three hydrolyses, NS4A-NS4B, NS4B-NS5A and NS5A-NS5B all occur in trans.
  • NS3 is a serine protease which is structurally classified as a chymotrypsin-like protease. While the NS serine protease possesses proteolytic activity by itself, the HCV protease enzyme is not an efficient enzyme in terms of catalyzing polyprotein cleavage. It has been shown that a central hydrophobic region of the NS4A protein is required for this enhancement. The complex formation of the NS3 protein with NS4A seems necessary to the processing events, enhancing the proteolytic efficacy at all of the sites.
  • a general strategy for the development of antiviral agents is to inactivate virally encoded enzymes, including NS3, that are essential for the replication of the virus.
  • Current efforts directed toward the discovery of NS3 protease inhibitors were reviewed by S. Tan, A. Pause, Y. Shi, N. Sonenberg, Hepatitis C Therapeutics: Current Status and Emerging Strategies, Nature Rev. Drug Discov., 1, 867-881 (2002).
  • Other patent disclosures describing the synthesis of HCV protease inhibitors are: WO 00/59929 (2000); WO 99/07733 (1999); WO 00/09543 (2000); WO 99/50230 (1999); U.S. Pat. No. 5,861,297 (1999); and US2002/0037998 (2002).
  • the present invention relates to novel macrocyclic compounds and methods of treating a hepatitis C infection in a subject in need of such therapy with said macrocyclic compounds.
  • the present invention further relates to pharmaceutical compositions comprising the compounds of the present invention, or pharmaceutically acceptable salts, esters, or prodrugs thereof, in combination with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or excipient.
  • A is independently selected from hydrogen; —(C ⁇ O)—O—R 1 , —(C ⁇ O)—R 2 , —C( ⁇ O)—NH—R 2 , —C( ⁇ S)—NH—R 2 , or —S(O) 2 —R 2 ;
  • G is independently selected from —OH, —O—(C 1 -C 12 alkyl), —NHS(O) 2 —R 1 , —(C ⁇ O)—R 2 , —(C ⁇ O)—O—R 1 , or —(C ⁇ O)—NH—R 2 ;
  • L is independently selected from —S—, —SCH 2 —, —SCH 2 CH 2 —, —S(O) 2 —, —S(O) 2 CH 2 CH 2 —, —S(O)—, —S(O)CH 2 CH 2 —, —O—, —OCH 2 —, —OCH 2 CH 2 —, —(C ⁇ O)—CH 2 —, —CH(CH 3 )CH 2 —, —CFHCH 2 —, or —CF 2 CH 2 —;
  • X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached form a cyclic moiety selected from aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, or substituted heteroaryl;
  • W is absent, or independently selected from —O—, —S—, —NH—, —C(O)NR 1 — or —NR 1 —;
  • Z is independently selected from hydrogen, —CN, —SCN, —NCO, —NCS, —NHNH 2 , —N 3 , halogen, —R 4 , —C 3 -C 12 cycloalkyl, substituted —C 3 -C 12 cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocycloalkyl, substituted heterocycloalkyl, or —NH—N ⁇ CH (R 1 );
  • Each R 1 is independently selected from hydrogen, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, substituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 1 -C 6 alkenyl, substituted C 1 -C 6 alkenyl, C 1 -C 6 alkynyl, substituted C 1 -C 6 alkynyl, C 3 -C 12 cycloalkyl, substituted C 3 -C 12 cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, or substituted heterocycloalkyl;
  • Each R 2 is independently selected from hydrogen, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, substituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 1 -C 6 alkenyl, substituted C 1 -C 6 alkenyl, C 1 -C 6 alkynyl, substituted C 1 -C 6 alkynyl, C 3 -C 12 cycloalkyl, substituted C 3 -C 12 cycloalkyl, alkylamino, dialkylamino, arylamino, diarylamino, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, or substituted heterocycloalkyl;
  • Each R 4 is independently selected from:
  • R 5 and R 6 are each independently selected from hydrogen or methyl
  • j 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4;
  • n 0, 1, or 2;
  • s 0, 1 or 2.
  • a first embodiment of the invention is a compound represented by Formula I as described above, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester or prodrug thereof, alone or in combination with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or excipient.
  • a second embodiment of the invention is a compound represented by Formula II as described above, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester or prodrug thereof, alone or in combination with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or excipient.
  • Representative subgenera of the invention include, but are not limited to:
  • Representative compounds of the invention include, but are not limited to, the following compounds:
  • Additional compounds of the invention are those of Formula V: wherein A and B are as defined in the A-Matrix and B-Matrix tables herein.
  • the A-Matrix and B-Matrix tables below set forth substituents present on the core ring structure shown in formula (V) which when one A substituent is selected from the A-Matrix and one B substituent is selected from the B-Matrix an additional compound of the invention is described.
  • Compounds are formed by selecting any element from the A-Matrix with any element from the B-matrix to arrive upon an A, B-substituted macrocycle of formula V.
  • a compound of Formula V wherein A is element 101 from the A-Matrix and B is element 301 from the B-Matrix, is designated by the number 101301.
  • the invention includes compounds of the formula V and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, wherein A is any element in the A-Matrix and B is any element of the B-Matrix.
  • Specific compounds include, but are not limited to, the following: 101301; 101358; 101306; 101302; 101322; 101311; 101325; 101303; 103304; 101326; 101327; 101330; 101331; 101332; 101335; 101336; 101348; 101340; 101334; 101348; 101359; 101328; 101360; 101361; 101362; 101329; 105301; 123301; 112301; 124301; 109301; 122301; 111301; 114301; 107301; 104301; 101324; 101304; 101355; 101356; 101307; 101357; 101347; 101352; 110301; 101364; 101308; 101309; 128301; 124301; 113301; 143301; 115301; 101367; 101368; 101323; 101317; 108301; 101318; 101319; 101351; 101353; 10
  • B-Matrix 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368
  • the pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention may further contain other anti-HCV agents.
  • anti-HCV agents include, but are not limited to, ⁇ -interferon, ⁇ -interferon, ribavirin, and amantadine.
  • anti-HCV agents include, but are not limited to, ⁇ -interferon, ⁇ -interferon, ribavirin, and amantadine.
  • anti-HCV agents include, but are not limited to, ⁇ -interferon, ⁇ -interferon, ribavirin, and amantadine.
  • compositions of the present invention may further contain other HCV protease inhibitors.
  • compositions of the present invention may further comprise inhibitor(s) of other targets in the HCV life cycle, including, but not limited to, helicase, polymerase, metalloprotease, and internal ribosome entry site (IRES).
  • inhibitor(s) of other targets in the HCV life cycle including, but not limited to, helicase, polymerase, metalloprotease, and internal ribosome entry site (IRES).
  • the present invention includes methods of treating hepatitis C infections in a subject in need of such treatment by administering to said subject an anti-HCV virally effective amount or an inhibitory amount of the pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention.
  • An additional embodiment of the present invention includes methods of treating biological samples by contacting the biological samples with the compounds of the present invention.
  • Yet a further aspect of the present invention is a process of making any of the compounds delineated herein employing any of the synthetic means delineated herein.
  • C 1 -C 3 alkyl refers to saturated, straight- or branched-chain hydrocarbon radicals containing between one and three, one and twelve, or one and six carbon atoms, respectively.
  • C 1 -C 3 alkyl radicals include methyl, ethyl, propyl and isopropyl radicals
  • examples of C 1 -C 6 alkyl radicals include, but are not limited to, methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, tert-butyl, neopentyl and n-hexyl radicals
  • examples of C 1 -C 12 alkyl radicals include, but are not limited to, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, n-hexyl, octyl, decyl, dodecyl radicals.
  • substituted alkyl refers to a “C 2 -C 12 alkyl” or “C 1 -C 6 alkyl” group substituted by independent replacement of one, two or three of the hydrogen atoms thereon with F, Cl, Br, I, OH, NO 2 , CN, C 1 -C 6 -alkyl-OH, C(O)—C 1 -C 6 -alkyl, C(O)H, OCH 2 —C 3 -C 12 -cycloalkyl, C(O)-aryl, C(O)-heteroaryl, CO 2 -alkyl, CO 2 -aryl, CO 2 -heteroaryl, CONH 2 , CONH—C 1 -C 6 -alkyl, CONH-aryl, CONH-heteroaryl, OC(O)—C 1 -C 6 -alkyl, OC(O)-aryl, OC(O)-hetero
  • C 2 -C 12 alkenyl or “C 2 -C 6 alkenyl,” as used herein, denote a monovalent group derived from a hydrocarbon moiety containing from two to twelve or two to six carbon atoms having at least one carbon-carbon double bond by the removal of a single hydrogen atom.
  • Alkenyl groups include, but are not limited to, for example, ethenyl, propenyl, butenyl, 1-methyl-2-buten-1-yl, and the like.
  • substituted alkenyl refers to a “C 2 -C 12 alkenyl” or “C 1 -C 6 alkenyl” group substituted by independent replacement of one, two or three of the hydrogen atoms thereon with F, Cl, Br, I, OH, NO 2 , CN, C 1 -C 6 -alkyl-OH, C(O)—C 1 -C 6 -alkyl, OCH 2 —C 3 -C 12 -cycloalkyl, C(O)H, C(O)-aryl, C(O)-heteroaryl, CO 2 -alkyl, CO 2 -aryl, CO 2 -heteroaryl, CONH 2 , CONH—C 1 -C 6 -alkyl, CONH-aryl, CONH-heteroaryl, OC(O)—C 1 -C 6 -alkyl, OC(O)-aryl, OC(O)-aryl, OC(O)-aryl
  • C 1 -C 12 alkynyl or “C 1 -C 6 alkynyl,” as used herein, denote a monovalent group derived from a hydrocarbon moiety containing from two to twelve or two to six carbon atoms having at least one carbon-carbon triple bond by the removal of a single hydrogen atom.
  • Representative alkynyl groups include, but are not limited to, for example, ethynyl, 1-propynyl, 1-butynyl, and the like.
  • substituted alkynyl refers to a “C 2 -C 12 alkynyl” or “C 1 -C 6 alkynyl” group substituted by independent replacement of one, two or three of the hydrogen atoms thereon with F, Cl, Br, I, OH, NO 2 , CN, C 1 -C 6 -alkyl-OH, C(O)—C 1 -C 6 -alkyl, OCH 2 —C 3 -C 12 -cycloalkyl, C(O)H, C(O)-aryl, C(O)-heteroaryl, CO 2 -alkyl, CO 2 -aryl, CO 2 -heteroaryl, CONH 2 , CONH—C 1 -C 6 -alkyl, CONH-aryl, CONH-heteroaryl, OC(O)—C 1 -C 6 -alkyl, OC(O)-aryl, OC(O)—C 1 -C 6 -
  • C 1 -C 6 alkoxy refers to a C 1 -C 6 alkyl group, as previously defined, attached to the parent molecular moiety through an oxygen atom.
  • Examples of C 1 -C 6 -alkoxy include, but are not limited to, methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, isopropoxy, n-butoxy, tert-butoxy, neopentoxy and n-hexoxy.
  • halo and “halogen,” as used herein, refer to an atom selected from fluorine, chlorine, bromine and iodine.
  • aryl refers to a mono- or bicyclic carbocyclic ring system having one or two aromatic rings including, but not limited to, phenyl, naphthyl, tetrahydronaphthyl, indanyl, idenyl and the like.
  • substituted aryl refers to an aryl group, as defined herein, substituted by independent replacement of one, two or three of the hydrogen atoms thereon with F, Cl, Br, I, OH, NO 2 , CN, C 1 -C 6 -alkyl-OH, C(O)—C 1 -C 6 -alkyl, OCH 2 —C 3 -C 12 -cycloalkyl, C(O)H, C(O)-aryl, C(O)-heteroaryl, CO 2 -alkyl, CO 2 -aryl, CO 2 -heteroaryl, CONH 2 , CONH—C 1 -C 6 -alkyl, CONH-aryl, CONH-heteroaryl, OC(O)—C 1 -C 6 -alkyl, OC(O)-aryl, OC(O)-heteroaryl, OCO 2 -alkyl, OCO 2 -alkyl, OCO 2 -
  • arylalkyl refers to a C 1 -C 3 alkyl or C 1 -C 6 alkyl residue attached to an aryl ring. Examples include, but are not limited to, benzyl, phenethyl and the like.
  • substituted arylalkyl refers to an arylalkyl group, as previously defined, substituted by independent replacement of one, two or three of the hydrogen atoms thereon with F, Cl, Br, I, OH, NO 2 , CN, C 1 -C 6 -alkyl-OH, C(O)—C 1 -C 6 -alkyl, OCH 2 —C 3 -C 12 -cycloalkyl, C(O)H, C(O)-aryl, C(O)-heteroaryl, CO 2 -alkyl, CO 2 -aryl, CO 2 -heteroaryl, CONH 2 , CONH—C 1 -C 6 -alkyl, CONH-aryl, CONH-heteroaryl, NHC(O)H, OC(O)—C 1 -C 6 -alkyl, OC(O)-aryl, OC(O)-heteroaryl,
  • heteroaryl refers to a mono-, bi-, or tri-cyclic aromatic radical or ring having from five to ten ring atoms of which one ring atom is selected from S, O and N; zero, one or two ring atoms are additional heteroatoms independently selected from S, O and N; and the remaining ring atoms are carbon.
  • Heteroaryl includes, but is not limited to, pyridinyl, pyrazinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrrolyl, pyrazolyl, imidazolyl, thiazolyl, oxazolyl, isooxazolyl, thiadiazolyl, oxadiazolyl, thiophenyl, furanyl, quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, benzimidazolyl, benzooxazolyl, quinoxalinyl, and the like.
  • substituted heteroaryl refers to a heteroaryl group as defined herein, substituted by independent replacement of one, two or three of the hydrogen atoms thereon with F, Cl, Br, I, OH, NO 2 , CN, C 1 -C 6 -alkyl-OH, C(O)—C 1 -C 6 -alkyl, OCH 2 —C 3 -C 12 -cycloalkyl, C(O)H, C(O)-aryl, C(O)-heteroaryl, CO 2 -alkyl, CO 2 -aryl, CO 2 -heteroaryl, CONH 2 , CONH—C 1 -C 6 -alkyl, CONH-aryl, CONH-heteroaryl, OC(O)—C 1 -C 6 -alkyl, OC(O)-aryl, OC(O)-heteroaryl, OCO 2 -alkyl, OCO 2 -alkyl, OCO 2 -
  • C 3 -C 12 -cycloalkyl denotes a monovalent group derived from a monocyclic or bicyclic saturated carbocyclic ring compound by the removal of a single hydrogen atom. Examples include, but not limited to, cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, bicyclo[2.2.1]heptyl, and bicyclo[2.2.2]octyl.
  • substituted C 3 -C 12 -cycloalkyl refers to a C 3 -C 12 -cycloalkyl group as defined herein, substituted by independent replacement of one, two or three of the hydrogen atoms thereon with F, Cl, Br, I, OH, NO 2 , CN, C 1 -C 6 -alkyl-OH, C(O)—C 1 -C 6 -alkyl, OCH 2 —C 3 -C 12 -cycloalkyl, C(O)H, C(O)-aryl, C(O)-heteroaryl, CO 2 -alkyl, CO 2 -aryl, CO 2 -heteroaryl, CONH 2 , CONH—C 1 -C 6 -alkyl, CONH-aryl, CONH-heteroaryl, OC(O)—C 1 -C 6 -alkyl, OC(O)-aryl, OC(O)—C 1 -C 6 -al
  • heterocycloalkyl refers to a non-aromatic 5-, 6- or 7-membered ring or a bi- or tri-cyclic group fused system, where (i) each ring contains between one and three heteroatoms independently selected from oxygen, sulfur and nitrogen, (ii) each 5-membered ring has 0 to 1 double bonds and each 6-membered ring has 0 to 2 double bonds, (iii) the nitrogen and sulfur heteroatoms may optionally be oxidized, (iv) the nitrogen heteroatom may optionally be quaternized, and (iv) any of the above rings may be fused to a benzene ring.
  • heterocycloalkyl groups include, but are not limited to, [1,3]dioxolane, pyrrolidinyl, pyrazolinyl, pyrazolidinyl, imidazolinyl, imidazolidinyl, piperidinyl, piperazinyl, oxazolidinyl, isoxazolidinyl, morpholinyl, thiazolidinyl, isothiazolidinyl, and tetrahydrofuryl.
  • substituted heterocycloalkyl refers to a heterocycloalkyl group, as previously defined, substituted by independent replacement or one, two, or three of the hydrogen atoms thereon with F, Cl, Br, I, OH, NO 2 , CN, C 1 -C 6 -alkyl-OH, C(O)—C 1 -C 6 -alkyl, OCH 2 —C 3 -C 12 -cycloalkyl, C(O)H, C(O)-aryl, C(O)-heteroaryl, CO 2 -alkyl, CO 2 -aryl, CO 2 -heteroaryl, CONH 2 , CONH—C 1 -C 6 -alkyl, CONH-aryl, CONH-heteroaryl, OC(O)—C 1 -C 6 -alkyl, OC(O)-aryl, OC(O)-heteroaryl, OCO 2 -
  • heteroarylalkyl refers to a C 1 -C 3 alkyl or C 1 -C 6 alkyl residue residue attached to a heteroaryl ring. Examples include, but are not limited to, pyridinylmethyl, pyrimidinylethyl and the like.
  • substituted heteroarylalkyl refers to a heteroarylalkyl group, as previously defined, substituted by independent replacement or one, two, or three of the hydrogen atoms thereon with F, Cl, Br, I, OH, NO 2 , CN, C 1 -C 6 -alkyl-OH, C(O)—C 1 -C 6 -alkyl, OCH 2 —C 3 -C 12 -cycloalkyl, C(O)H, C(O)-aryl, C(O)-heteroaryl, CO 2 -alkyl, CO 2 -aryl, CO 2 -heteroaryl, CONH 2 , CONH—C 1 -C 6 -alkyl, CONH-aryl, CONH-heteroaryl, OC(O)—C 1 -C 6 -alkyl, OC(O)-aryl, OC(O)-heteroaryl, OCO 2 -
  • any substituted group defined above e.g. substituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl, substituted C 1 -C 6 alkenyl, substituted C 1 -C 6 alkynyl, substituted C 3 -C 12 cycloalkyl, substituted aryl, substituted arylalkyl, substituted heteroaryl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, or substituted heterocycloalkyl
  • alkylamino refers to a group having the structure —NH(C 1 -C 12 alkyl) where C 1 -C 12 alkyl is as previously defined.
  • dialkylamino refers to a group having the structure —N(C 1 -C 12 alkyl) 2 where C 1 -C 12 alkyl is as previously defined.
  • Examples of dialkylamino are, but not limited to, N,N-dimethylamino, N,N-diethylamino, N,N-methylethylamino, and the like.
  • diarylamino refers to a group having the structure —N(aryl) 2 or —N(substituted aryl) 2 where substituted aryl is as previously defined.
  • Examples of diarylamino are, but not limited to, N,N-diphenylamino, N,N-dinaphthylamino, N,N-di(toluenyl)amino, and the like.
  • diheteroarylamino refers to a group having the structure —N(heteroaryl) 2 or —N(substituted heteroaryl) 2 , where heteroaryl and substituted heteroaryl is as previously defined.
  • Examples of diheteroarylamino are, but not limited to, N,N-difuranylamino, N,N-dithiazolidinylamino, N,N-di(imidazole)amino, and the like.
  • the compounds described herein contain one or more asymmetric centers and thus give rise to enantiomers, diastereomers, and other stereoisomeric forms that may be defined, in terms of absolute stereochemistry, as (R)- or (S)-, or as (D)- or (L)-for amino acids.
  • the present invention is meant to include all such possible isomers, as well as their racemic and optically pure forms.
  • Optical isomers may be prepared from their respective optically active precursors by the procedures described above, or by resolving the racemic mixtures. The resolution can be carried out in the presence of a resolving agent, by chromatography or by repeated crystallization or by some combination of these techniques which are known to those skilled in the art.
  • subject refers to a mammal.
  • a subject therefore refers to, for example, dogs, cats, horses, cows, pigs, guinea pigs, and the like.
  • the subject is a human.
  • the subject may be referred to herein as a patient.
  • the term “pharmaceutically acceptable salt” refers to those salts of the compounds formed by the process of the present invention which are, within the scope of sound medical judgment, suitable for use in contact with the tissues of humans and lower animals without undue toxicity, irritation, allergic response and the like, and are commensurate with a reasonable benefit/risk ratio.
  • Pharmaceutically acceptable salts are well known in the art. For example, S. M. Berge, et al. describes pharmaceutically acceptable salts in detail in J. Pharmaceutical Sciences, 66: 1-19 (1977). The salts can be prepared in situ during the final isolation and purification of the compounds of the invention, or separately by reacting the free base function with a suitable organic acid.
  • nontoxic acid addition salts are salts of an amino group formed with inorganic acids such as hydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, phosphoric acid, sulfuric acid and perchloric acid or with organic acids such as acetic acid, maleic acid, tartaric acid, citric acid, succinic acid or malonic acid or by using other methods used in the art such as ion exchange.
  • salts include, but are not limited to, adipate, alginate, ascorbate, aspartate, benzenesulfonate, benzoate, bisulfate, borate, butyrate, camphorate, camphorsulfonate, citrate, cyclopentanepropionate, digluconate, dodecylsulfate, ethanesulfonate, formate, fumarate, glucoheptonate, glycerophosphate, gluconate, hemisulfate, heptanoate, hexanoate, hydroiodide, 2-hydroxy-ethanesulfonate, lactobionate, lactate, laurate, lauryl sulfate, malate, maleate, malonate, methanesulfonate, 2-naphthalenesulfonate, nicotinate, nitrate, oleate, oxalate, palmitate, pamo
  • alkali or alkaline earth metal salts include sodium, lithium, potassium, calcium, magnesium, and the like.
  • Further pharmaceutically acceptable salts include, when appropriate, nontoxic ammonium, quaternary ammonium, and amine cations formed using counterions such as halide, hydroxide, carboxylate, sulfate, phosphate, nitrate, alkyl having from 1 to 6 carbon atoms, sulfonate and aryl sulfonate.
  • ester refers to esters of the compounds formed by the process of the present invention which hydrolyze in vivo and include those that break down readily in the human body to leave the parent compound or a salt thereof.
  • Suitable ester groups include, for example, those derived from pharmaceutically acceptable aliphatic carboxylic acids, particularly alkanoic, alkenoic, cycloalkanoic and alkanedioic acids, in which each alkyl or alkenyl moiety advantageously has not more than 6 carbon atoms.
  • esters include, but are not limited to, formates, acetates, propionates, butyrates, acrylates and ethylsuccinates.
  • prodrugs refers to those prodrugs of the compounds formed by the process of the present invention which are, within the scope of sound medical judgment, suitable for use in contact with the tissues of humans and lower animals with undue toxicity, irritation, allergic response, and the like, commensurate with a reasonable benefit/risk ratio, and effective for their intended use, as well as the zwitterionic forms, where possible, of the compounds of the present invention.
  • Prodrug as used herein means a compound which is convertible in vivo by metabolic means (e.g. by hydrolysis) to afford any compound delineated by the formulae of the instant invention.
  • prodrugs are known in the art, for example, as discussed in Bundgaard, (ed.), Design of Prodrugs, Elsevier (1985); Widder, et al. (ed.), Methods in Enzymology, vol. 4, Academic Press (1985); Krogsgaard-Larsen, et al., (ed). “Design and Application of Prodrugs, Textbook of Drug Design and Development, Chapter 5, 113-191 (1991); Bundgaard, et al., Journal of Drug Deliver Reviews, 8:1-38(1992); Bundgaard, J. of Pharmaceutical Sciences, 77:285 et seq.
  • stable refers to compounds which possess stability sufficient to allow manufacture and which maintains the integrity of the compound for a sufficient period of time to be useful for the purposes detailed herein (e.g., therapeutic or prophylactic administration to a subject).
  • the synthesized compounds can be separated from a reaction mixture and further purified by a method such as column chromatography, high pressure liquid chromatography, or recrystallization.
  • a method such as column chromatography, high pressure liquid chromatography, or recrystallization.
  • further methods of synthesizing the compounds of the formulae herein will be evident to those of ordinary skill in the art.
  • the various synthetic steps may be performed in an alternate sequence or order to give the desired compounds.
  • the solvents, temperatures, reaction durations, etc. delineated herein are for purposes of illustration only and one of ordinary skill in the art will recognize that variation of the reaction conditions can produce the desired bridged macrocyclic products of the present invention.
  • Synthetic chemistry transformations and protecting group methodologies useful in synthesizing the compounds described herein are known in the art and include, for example, those such as described in R. Larock, Comprehensive Organic Transformations, VCH Publishers (1989); T. W. Greene and P. G. M. Wuts, Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, 2d. Ed., John Wiley and Sons (1991); L. Fieser and M. Fieser, Fieser and Fieser's Reagents for Organic Synthesis, John Wiley and Sons (1994); and L. Paquette, ed., Encyclopedia of Reagents for Organic Synthesis, John Wiley and Sons (1995).
  • the compounds of this invention may be modified by appending various functionalities via any synthetic means delineated herein to enhance selective biological properties.
  • modifications are known in the art and include those which increase biological penetration into a given biological system (e.g., blood, lymphatic system, central nervous system), increase oral availability, increase solubility to allow administration by injection, alter metabolism and alter rate of excretion.
  • compositions of the present invention comprise a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of the present invention formulated together with one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable carrier means a non-toxic, inert solid, semi-solid or liquid filler, diluent, encapsulating material or formulation auxiliary of any type.
  • materials which can serve as pharmaceutically acceptable carriers are sugars such as lactose, glucose and sucrose; starches such as corn starch and potato starch; cellulose and its derivatives such as sodium carboxymethyl cellulose, ethyl cellulose and cellulose acetate; powdered tragacanth; malt; gelatin; talc; excipients such as cocoa butter and suppository waxes; oils such as peanut oil, cottonseed oil; safflower oil; sesame oil; olive oil; corn oil and soybean oil; glycols; such a propylene glycol; esters such as ethyl oleate and ethyl laurate; agar; buffering agents such as magnesium hydroxide and aluminum hydroxide; alginic acid; pyrogen-free water; isotonic saline; Ringer's solution; ethyl alcohol, and phosphate buffer solutions, as well as other non-toxic compatible lubricants such as sodium lauryl sulf
  • compositions of this invention can be administered to humans and other animals orally, rectally, parenterally, intracisternally, intravaginally, intraperitoneally, topically (as by powders, ointments, or drops), buccally, or as an oral or nasal spray.
  • Liquid dosage forms for oral administration include pharmaceutically acceptable emulsions, microemulsions, solutions, suspensions, syrups and elixirs.
  • the liquid dosage forms may contain inert diluents commonly used in the art such as, for example, water or other solvents, solubilizing agents and emulsifiers such as ethyl alcohol, isopropyl alcohol, ethyl carbonate, ethyl acetate, benzyl alcohol, benzyl benzoate, propylene glycol, 1,3-butylene glycol, dimethylformamide, oils (in particular, cottonseed, groundnut, corn, germ, olive, castor, and sesame oils), glycerol, tetrahydrofurfuryl alcohol, polyethylene glycols and fatty acid esters of sorbitan, and mixtures thereof.
  • the oral compositions can also include adjuvants such as wetting agents, e
  • sterile injectable aqueous or oleaginous suspensions may be formulated according to the known art using suitable dispersing or wetting agents and suspending agents.
  • the sterile injectable preparation may also be a sterile injectable solution, suspension or emulsion in a nontoxic parenterally acceptable diluent or solvent, for example, as a solution in 1,3-butanediol.
  • acceptable vehicles and solvents that may be employed are water, Ringer's solution, U.S.P. and isotonic sodium chloride solution.
  • sterile, fixed oils are conventionally employed as a solvent or suspending medium.
  • any bland fixed oil can be employed including synthetic mono- or diglycerides.
  • fatty acids such as oleic acid are used in the preparation of injectables.
  • the injectable formulations can be sterilized, for example, by filtration through a bacterial-retaining filter, or by incorporating sterilizing agents in the form of sterile solid compositions which can be dissolved or dispersed in sterile water or other sterile injectable medium prior to use.
  • the rate of drug release can be controlled.
  • biodegradable polymers include poly(orthoesters) and poly(anhydrides).
  • Depot injectable formulations are also prepared by entrapping the drug in liposomes or microemulsions which are compatible with body tissues.
  • compositions for rectal or vaginal administration are preferably suppositories which can be prepared by mixing the compounds of this invention with suitable non-irritating excipients or carriers such as cocoa butter, polyethylene glycol or a suppository wax which are solid at ambient temperature but liquid at body temperature and therefore melt in the rectum or vaginal cavity and release the active compound.
  • suitable non-irritating excipients or carriers such as cocoa butter, polyethylene glycol or a suppository wax which are solid at ambient temperature but liquid at body temperature and therefore melt in the rectum or vaginal cavity and release the active compound.
  • compositions of a similar type may also be employed as fillers in soft and hard-filled gelatin capsules using such excipients as lactose or milk sugar as well as high molecular weight polyethylene glycols and the like.
  • the active compounds can also be in micro-encapsulated form with one or more excipients as noted above.
  • the solid dosage forms of tablets, dragees, capsules, pills, and granules can be prepared with coatings and shells such as enteric coatings, release controlling coatings and other coatings well known in the pharmaceutical formulating art.
  • the active compound may be admixed with at least one inert diluent such as sucrose, lactose or starch.
  • Such dosage forms may also comprise, as is normal practice, additional substances other than inert diluents, e.g., tableting lubricants and other tableting aids such a magnesium stearate and microcrystalline cellulose.
  • the dosage forms may also comprise buffering agents. They may optionally contain opacifying agents and can also be of a composition that they release the active ingredient(s) only, or preferentially, in a certain part of the intestinal tract, optionally, in a delayed manner.
  • buffering agents include polymeric substances and waxes.
  • Dosage forms for topical or transdermal administration of a compound of this invention include ointments, pastes, creams, lotions, gels, powders, solutions, sprays, inhalants or patches.
  • the active component is admixed under sterile conditions with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and any needed preservatives or buffers as may be required.
  • Ophthalmic formulation, ear drops, eye ointments, powders and solutions are also contemplated as being within the scope of this invention.
  • the ointments, pastes, creams and gels may contain, in addition to an active compound of this invention, excipients such as animal and vegetable fats, oils, waxes, paraffins, starch, tragacanth, cellulose derivatives, polyethylene glycols, silicones, bentonites, silicic acid, talc and zinc oxide, or mixtures thereof.
  • excipients such as animal and vegetable fats, oils, waxes, paraffins, starch, tragacanth, cellulose derivatives, polyethylene glycols, silicones, bentonites, silicic acid, talc and zinc oxide, or mixtures thereof.
  • Powders and sprays can contain, in addition to the compounds of this invention, excipients such as lactose, talc, silicic acid, aluminum hydroxide, calcium silicates and polyamide powder, or mixtures of these substances.
  • Sprays can additionally contain customary propellants such as chlorofluorohydrocarbons.
  • Transdermal patches have the added advantage of providing controlled delivery of a compound to the body.
  • dosage forms can be made by dissolving or dispensing the compound in the proper medium.
  • Absorption enhancers can also be used to increase the flux of the compound across the skin.
  • the rate can be controlled by either providing a rate controlling membrane or by dispersing the compound in a polymer matrix or gel.
  • An inhibitory amount or dose of the compounds of the present invention may range from about 0.1 mg/Kg to about 500 mg/Kg, alternatively from about 1 to about 50 mg/Kg. Inhibitory amounts or doses will also vary depending on route of administration, as well as the possibility of co-usage with other agents.
  • viral infections are treated or prevented in a subject such as a human or lower mammal by administering to the subject an anti-hepatitis C virally effective amount or an inhibitory amount of a compound of the present invention, in such amounts and for such time as is necessary to achieve the desired result.
  • An additional method of the present invention is the treatment of biological samples with an inhibitory amount of a compound of composition of the present invention in such amounts and for such time as is necessary to achieve the desired result.
  • anti-hepatitis C virally effective amount of a compound of the invention, as used herein, mean a sufficient amount of the compound so as to decrease the viral load in a biological sample or in a subject.
  • an anti-hepatitis C virally effective amount of a compound of this invention will be at a reasonable benefit/risk ratio applicable to any medical treatment.
  • inhibitory amount of a compound of the present invention means a sufficient amount to decrease the hepatitis C viral load in a biological sample or a subject. It is understood that when said inhibitory amount of a compound of the present invention is administered to a subject it will be at a reasonable benefit/risk ratio applicable to any medical treatment as determined by a physician.
  • biological sample(s),” as used herein means a substance of biological origin intended for administration to a subject. Examples of biological samples include, but are not limited to, blood and components thereof such as plasma, platelets, subpopulations of blood cells and the like; organs such as kidney, liver, heart, lung, and the like; sperm and ova; bone marrow and components thereof, or stem cells.
  • another embodiment of the present invention is a method of treating a biological sample by contacting said biological sample with an inhibitory amount of a compound or pharmaceutical composition of the present invention.
  • a maintenance dose of a compound, composition or combination of this invention may be administered, if necessary. Subsequently, the dosage or frequency of administration, or both, may be reduced, as a function of the symptoms, to a level at which the improved condition is retained when the symptoms have been alleviated to the desired level, treatment should cease.
  • the subject may, however, require intermittent treatment on a long-term basis upon any recurrence of disease symptoms.
  • the total daily usage of the compounds and compositions of the present invention will be decided by the attending physician within the scope of sound medical judgment.
  • the specific inhibitory dose for any particular patient will depend upon a variety of factors including the disorder being treated and the severity of the disorder; the activity of the specific compound employed; the specific composition employed; the age, body weight, general health, sex and diet of the patient; the time of administration, route of administration, and rate of excretion of the specific compound employed; the duration of the treatment; drugs used in combination or coincidental with the specific compound employed; and like factors well known in the medical arts.
  • the total daily inhibitory dose of the compounds of this invention administered to a subject in single or in divided doses can be in amounts, for example, from 0.01 to 50 mg/kg body weight or more usually from 0.1 to 25 mg/kg body weight.
  • Single dose compositions may contain such amounts or submultiples thereof to make up the daily dose.
  • treatment regimens according to the present invention comprise administration to a patient in need of such treatment from about 10 mg to about 1000 mg of the compound(s) of this invention per day in single or multiple doses.
  • the quinoxaline analogs of the present invention were prepared via several different synthetic routes.
  • the simplest method, shown in Scheme 2, is to condense commercially available 1H-quinoxalin-2-one analogs including, but not limited to, compounds 2-1-2-5 with key intermediate 1-6 by using Mitsunobu conditions followed by hydrolysis with LiOH.
  • the existing literature predicts Mistonobu product formation at the 1 position nitrogen, however attachment at the carbonyl oxygen was observed to form compound 2-2.
  • a detailed discussion of the identification and characterization of the unexpected oxo Mitosunobu addition product appears in the examples herein. For further details on the Mitsunobu reaction, see O. Mitsunobu, Synthesis 1981, 1-28; D. L. Hughes, Org. React. 29, 1-162 (1983); D. L. Hughes, Organic Preparations and Procedures Int. 28, 127-164 (1996); and J. A. Dodge, S. A. Jones, Recent Res. Dev. Org. Chem. 1, 273-283 (1997).
  • Various quinoxaline derivatives of formula (3-3) can be made with phenyl diamines of formula (3-1), wherein R 4 is previously defined, and keto acids or esters of formula (3-2), wherein R 4 is previously defined, in anhydrous methanol at room temperature (see Bekerman et al., J. Heterocycl. Chem. 1992, 29, 129-133 for further details of this reaction).
  • phenyl diamines suitable for creating quinoxaline derivatives of formula (3-3) include, but are not limited to, 1,2-diamino-4-nitrobenze, o-phenylenediamine, 3,4-diaminotoluene, 4-chloro-1,2-phenylenediamine, methyl-3,4-diaminobenzoate, benzo[1,3]dioxole-5,6-diamine, 1,2-diamino-4,5-methylene dioxybenzene, 4-chloro-5-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzenediamine, and the like.
  • keto acids suitable for the reaction described in Scheme 3 include, but are not limited to, benzoylformic acid, phenylpyruvic acid, indole-3-glyoxylic acid, indole-3-pyruvic acid, nitrophenylpyruvic acid, (2-furyl)glyoxylic acid, and the like.
  • keto esters suitable for the reaction described in Scheme 3 include, but are not limited to ethyl thiophene-2-glyoxylate, ethyl 2-oxo-4-phenylbutyrate, ethyl 2-(formylamino)-4-thiazolyl glyoxylate, ethyl-2-amino-4-thiozolyl glyoxylate, ethyl-2-oxo-4-phenylbutyrate, ethyl-(5-bromothien-2-yl)glyoxylate, ethyl-3-indolylglyoxylate, ethyl-2-methylbenzoyl formate, ethyl-3-ethylbenzoyl formate, ethyl-3-ethylbenzoyl formate, ethyl-4-cyano-2-oxobutyrate, methyl(1-methylindolyl)-3-glyoxylate, and the like.
  • 3,6 substituted quinoxalin-2-ones of formula (4-4), wherein R 4 is previously defined can be made in a regioselective manner to favor the 6-positon substitution beginning with the amide coupling of 4-methoxy-2-nitro aniline (4-1) and substituted gloxylic acid (4-2) to yield compound (4-3).
  • the 3,6-substituted quinoxalin-2-one (4-4) is created via catalytic reduction of the nitro of compound (4-3) followed by condensation to the 3,6-substituted quinoxalin-2-one (4-4).
  • Other substituents may be introduced into (4-4) through the use of other 2-nitroanilines.
  • keto acids suitable for the reaction described in Scheme 4 include, but are not limited to, benzoylformic acid, phenylpyruvic acid, indole-3-glyoxylic acid, indole-3-pyruvic acid, nitrophenylpyruvic acid, (2-furyl)glyoxylic acid, and the like.
  • 2-nitro anilines suitable for the reaction described in Scheme 4 include, but are not limited to, 4-ethoxy-2-nitroaniline, 4-amino-3-nitrobenzotrifluoride, 4,5-dimethyl-2-nitroaniline, 4-fluoro-2-nitroaniline, 4-chloro-2-nitroaniline, 4-amino-3-nitromethylbenzoate, 4-benzoyl-2-nitroaniline, 3-bromo-4-methoxy-2-nitroaniline, 3′-amino-4′-methyl-2-nitroacetophenone, 5-ethoxy-4-fluoro-2-nitroaniline, 4-bromo-2-nitroaniline, 4-(trifluoromethoxy)-2-nitroaniline, ethyl-4-amino3-nitrobenzoate, 4-bromo-2-methyl-6-nitroaniline, 4-propoxy-2-nitroaniline, 5-(propylthio)-2-nitroaniline, and the like.
  • boronic acids suitable for Suzuki coupling to macrocyclic key intermediate (5-5) include, but are not limited to, 2-bromo thiophene, phenylboronic acid, 5-bromothiophene-3-boronic acid, 4-cyanophenylboronic acid, 4-trifluormethoxyphenylboronic acid, and the like.
  • Terminal alkenes suitable for the Sonogashira reaction with macrocyclic key intermediate (5-5) include, but are not limited to, ethynylbenzene, 4-cyano-ethynylbenzene, propargylbenzene, and the like.
  • Organostannanes suitable for Stille coupling with key macrocyclic intermediate (5-4) include, but are not limited to, tributyltin cyanide, allyl-tri-n-butyltin, 2-tributyltin-pyridine, 2-tri-n-butyltin furan, 2-tri-n-butyltin thiophene, 2,3-dihydron-5-(tri-n-butyltin)benzofuran, and the like.
  • the amino-substituted quinoxaline (6-1), wherein R 1 and R 4 are as previously defined, can be formed through adding to a 0.1M solution of macrocyclic quinoxalinyl intermediate (5-4) in 10 ml DMF, K 2 CO 3 (2 equiv.) and HNR 1 R 4 (1.2 equiv.), and stirring the resulting reaction mixture at room temperature for 5-12 hours.
  • Amines suitable for these conditions include, but are not limited to, ethyl amine, 2-phenyl ethyl amine, cyclohexylamine, ethylmethylamine, diisopropyl amine, benzylethyl amine, 4-pentenyl amine, propargyl amine and the like.
  • ethers to the 2 position of the quinoxaline ring can be achieved through treating a 0.1M solution of macrocyclic quinoxalinyl intermediate (5-4) in DMF with K 2 CO 3 (2 equiv.) and HOR 4 (1.2 equiv.), wherein R 4 is previously defined.
  • the resulting reaction mixture can then be stirred for 5-12 hours at room temperature to arrive at the desired ether moiety at the 3 postion.
  • Alcohols suitable for these conditions include, but are not limited to, ethanol, propanol, isobutanol, trifluoromethanol, phenol, 4-methoxyphenol, pyridin-3-ol, and the like.
  • Thioesters can be made via the same procedure.
  • Derivation of the benzo portion of the quinoxaline ring may be achieved through the halogen-substituted quinoxaline of formula (7-2).
  • Quinoxaline of formula (7-2) can be formed with chloro-substituted phenyldiamine (7-1) with diketo compound of formula (7-2), wherein W, Z, and R 3 are as previously defined, in anhydrous methanol as previously detailed.
  • Intermediate (7-3) is formed under Mitsunobu conditions with macrocyclic precursor (7-6) and chlorosubstituted quinoxaline (7-2).
  • Intermediate (7-3) may then undergo Suzuki coupling reactions, Sonogashira reactions, or Stille couplings at the position occupied by the chloro.
  • the 3-substituted 2-Oxo-1,2-dihydro-quinoxaline-6-carboxylic acid intermediate (8-4) can be formed via condensation of ethyl 3,4-diaminobenzoate (8-1) and oxo acetic acid of formula (8-2), wherein R 4 is previously defined, via the method described previously in Scheme 3 (see Bekerman et al., J. Heterocycl. Chem. 1992, 29, 129-133 for further details).
  • the resulting ethyl ester (8- 3 ) is then hydrolyzed with LiOH in MeOH at room temperature to yield carboxylic acid intermediate (8-4).
  • Carboxylic acid (8-4) then may be converted to substituted ketone (8-6) via Weinreb's amide (8-5) and subsequent treatment with various Grignard Reagents (see Weinreb et al. Tetrahedron Lett. 1977, 4171; Weinreb et al, Synth. Commun. 1982, 12, 989 for details of the formation and use of Weinreb's amide; and see B. S. Furniss, A. J. Hannaford, P. W. G. Smith, A. R. Tatchell, Vogel's Textbook of Practical Organic Chemistry, 5 th ed., Longman, 1989). The addition is performed in an inert solvent, generally at low temperatures.
  • Suitable solvents include, but are not limited to, tetrahydrofuran, diethylether, 1,4-dioxane, 1,2-dimethoxyethane, and hexanes.
  • the solvent is tetrahydrofuran or diethylether.
  • the reaction is run at ⁇ 78° C. to 0° C.
  • carboxylic acid (8-4) may be used to form various amides of formula (8-7), wherein R 1 and R 4 are previously defined, in a manner generally described in Scheme 8. All of the various quinoxalin-2-one compounds described in Scheme 8 are further coupled to the macrocyclic precursor via the Mitsunobu conditions described above
  • 6-nitro-1H-quinoxalin-2-one (9-3) can be formed in the manner previously described from the 3,4-diaminonitrobenzene and the oxo acetic acid of formula (9-2), wherein R 4 is previously described. Reduction of the-nitro group at the 6-position can be achieved via Pd/C with H 2 NNH 2 .H 2 O in refluxing MeOH. The 6-position amine (9-4) then can be treated with a wide array of acid chlorides to arrive upon various amides of formula (9-5).
  • Quinoxalin-2-one of formula (9-7) can be formed via the condensation of 3,4-diaminobenzyl alcohol and various oxo acetic acids of formula (9-2), wherein R 4 is as previously defined as elucidated in previous schemes.
  • the resulting benzyl alcohol (9-7) may then be oxidized under Swern conditions, or any other oxidation conditionsto arrive on aldehyde of formula (9-8).
  • Swern reaction see A. J. Mancuso, D. Swern, Synthesis 1981, 165-185 passim; T. T. Tidwell, Org. React. 39, 297-572 passim (1990).
  • Reduction of the preceding quinoxalinyl macrocyclic compounds is performed by treating a solution of the ethyl ester (7-4) in THF/MeOH/H 2 O with LiOH.H 2 O to afford the corresponding free acid.
  • the dipeptide 1c (1.91 g) is dissolved in 15 mL of dioxane and 15 mL of 1 N LiOH aqueous solution and the hydrolysis reaction is carried out at room temperature for 4 hours.
  • the reaction mixture is acidified by 5% citric acid and extracted with 100 mL EtOAc, and followed by washing with water 2 ⁇ 20 ml, 1M NaHCO 3 2 ⁇ 20 ml and brine 2 ⁇ 20 ml, respectively.
  • the organic phase is dried over anhydrous Na 2 SO 4 and then removed in vacuum, yielding the free carboxylic acid compound 1d (1.79 g, 97%), which is used for next step synthesis without need for further purification.
  • the organic phase is dried over anhydrous Na 2 SO 4 and then evaporated.
  • the residue is purified by silica gel flash chromatography using different ratios of hexanes:EtOAc as elution phase (5:1 ⁇ 3:1 ⁇ 1:1 ⁇ 1:2 ⁇ 1:5).
  • MS Found 516.28, M+Na + .
  • the title compound is prepared with 3-ethyl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one and the title compound from Example 1 under the Mitsunobu conditions described in Example 2, followed by the reduction of the ethyl ester via treatment with LiOH as elucidated in Example 2.
  • the title compound is prepared with 3-phenyl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one and the title compound from Example 1 under the Mitsunobu conditions described in Example 2, followed by the reduction of the ethyl ester via treatment with LiOH as elucidated in Example 2.
  • the title compound is prepared with 3-(4-methoxyphenyl)-1H-quinoxalin-2-one and the title compound from Example 1 under the Mitsunobu conditions described in Example 2, followed by the reduction of the ethyl ester via treatment with LiOH as elucidated in Example 2.
  • the title compound is prepared with 3-(4-ethoxyphenyl)-1H-quinoxalin-2-one and the title compound from Example 1 under the Mitsunobu conditions described in Example 2, followed by the reduction of the ethyl ester via treatment with LiOH as elucidated in Example 2.
  • the title compound is prepared with 3-(5-bromothiophen-2-yl)-1H-quinoxalin-2-one and the title compound from Example 1 under the Mitsunobu conditions described in Example 2, followed by the reduction of the ethyl ester via treatment with LiOH as elucidated in Example 2.
  • the title compound is prepared with 3-[2-(pyrid-3-yl)-vinyl]-1H-quinoxalin-2-one and the title compound from Example 1 under the Mitsunobu conditions described in Example 2, followed by the reduction of the ethyl ester via treatment with LiOH as elucidated in Example 2.
  • the title compound is prepared with 3-[2-(3,4-Dimethoxy-phenyl)-vinyl]-1H-quinoxalin-2-one and the title compound from Example 1 under the Mitsunobu conditions described in Example 2, followed by the reduction of the ethyl ester via treatment with LiOH as elucidated in Example 2.
  • the title compound is prepared with 3-[2-thiophen-2-ylvinyl]-1H-quinoxalin-2-one and the title compound from Example 1 under the Mitsunobu conditions described in Example 2, followed by the reduction of the ethyl ester via treatment with LiOH as elucidated in Example 2.
  • the quinoxalin-2-one of the present example is prepared by heating the commercially available phenyl-1,2-diamine (3.6 mmol) and indole-3-glyoxylic acid (1 equiv.) in ethanol (40 mL) to reflux for 5 hours. After the mixture is cooled to room temperature, the excess ethanol was evaporated in vacuo, and the residue is placed under high vacuum for 2 hours to give 3-(1H-Indol-3-yl)-1H-quinoxalin-2-one.
  • the title compound is prepared with 3-(1H-Indol-3-yl)-1H-quinoxalin-2-one and the title compound from Example 1 under the Mitsunobu conditions described in Example 2, followed by the reduction of the ethyl ester via treatment with LiOH as elucidated in Example 2.
  • the quinoxalin-2-one of the present example is prepared with phenyl-1,2-diamine and indole-3-pyruvic acid via the method described in Example 12 to afford 3-(1H-Indol-3-ylmethyl)-1H-quinoxalin-2-one.
  • the title compound is prepared with 3-(1H-Indol-3-ylmethyl)-1H-quinoxalin-2-one and the title compound from Example 1 under the Mitsunobu conditions described in Example 2, followed by the reduction of the ethyl ester via treatment with LiOH as elucidated in Example 2.
  • the quinoxalin-2-one of the present example is prepared with phenyl-1,2-diamine and furan-2-yl glyoxylic acid via the method described in Example 12 to afford 3-(furan-2-yl)-1H-quinoxalin-2-one.
  • the title compound is prepared with 3-(furan-2-yl)-1H-quinoxalin-2-one and the title compound from Example 1 under the Mitsunobu conditions described in Example 2, followed by the reduction of the ethyl ester via treatment with LiOH as elucidated in Example 2.
  • the quinoxalin-2-one of the present example is prepared with phenyl-1,2-diamine and (1H-benzoimidazol-2-yl) oxo-acetic acid via the method described in Example 12 to afford 3-(1H-benzoimidazol-2-yl)-1H-quinoxalin-2-one.
  • the title compound is prepared with 3-(1H-benzoimidazol-2-yl)-1H-quinoxalin-2-one and the title compound from Example 1 under the Mitsunobu conditions described in Example 2, followed by the reduction of the ethyl ester via treatment with LiOH as elucidated in Example 2.
  • the quinoxalin-2-one of the present example is prepared with phenyl-1,2-diamine and (1H-benzoimidazol-2-yl) oxo-acetic acid via the method described in Example 12 to afford 3-(1H-Imidazol-2-ylmethyl)-1H-quinoxalin-2-one.
  • the title compound is prepared with 3-(1H-Imidazol-2-ylmethyl)-1H-quinoxalin-2-one and the title compound from Example 1 under the Mitsunobu conditions described in Example 2, followed by the reduction of the ethyl ester via treatment with LiOH as elucidated in Example 2.
  • the quinoxalin-2-one of the present example is prepared with phenyl-1,2-diamine and oxalic acid via the method described in Example 12 to afford the 1,4-Dihydro quinoaxline-2,3-dione.
  • the 1,4-Dihydro quinoaxline-2,3-dione is then treated with SOCl 2 in 2.5% DMF:toluene, heated to 130° C., stirred for 2 h, filtered and concentrated to afford the 3-chloro-1H-quinoxalin-2-one in crude form.
  • the title compound is prepared by reaction of a degassed solution of the title compound from Example 17 (4 mmol), 2-pyrid-3-yl acetylene (4 mmol), and 1 ml of triethylamine and 10 ml of acetonitrile with PdCl 2 (PPh 3 ) 2 (0.2 mmol) and CuI (0.1 mmol).
  • the resulting reaction mixture is degassed and stirred for 5 minutes at room temperature.
  • the reaction is then heated to 90° C. and stirred for 12 hours.
  • the reaction mixture is concentrated in vacuo and purified by silica column to afford the ethyl ester of the title compound.
  • the ethyl ester is then hydrolyzed to the free acid via treatment with LiOH as elucidated in Example 2 to arrive at the title compound.
  • the title compound is formed by reacting a 0.1M solution of the title compound from Example 17 in DMF with propargylamine (1.2 equiv.) in the presence of K 2 CO 3 (2 equiv.) at room temperature for 5-12 hours.
  • the resulting reaction mixture is then extracted with EtOAc, washed with NaHCO 3 , water, and brine, and the washed extract is concentrated in vacuo.
  • the residue is then purified by silica chromatography to yield the ethyl ester of the title compound.
  • the ethyl ester is then hydrolyzed to the free acid via treatment with LiOH to arrive upon the title compound.
  • the title compound is formed by reacting a 0.1M solution of the title compound from Example 17 in DMF with benzylethylamine (1.2 equiv.) in the presence of K 2 CO 3 (2 equiv.) at room temperature for 5-12 hours.
  • the resulting reaction mixture is then extracted with EtOAc, washed with NaHCO 3 , water, and brine, and the washed extract is concentrated in vacuo.
  • the residue is then purified by silica chromatography to yield the ethyl ester of the title compound.
  • the ethyl ester is then hydrolyzed to the free acid via treatment with LiOH to arrive upon the title compound.
  • the title compound is formed by reacting a 0.1M solution of the title compound from Example 17 in DMF with 3-aminopyridine (1.2 equiv.) in the presence of K 2 CO 3 (2 equiv.) at room temperature for 5-12 hours.
  • the resulting reaction mixture is then extracted with EtOAc, washed with NaHCO 3 , water, and brine, and the washed extract is concentrated in vacuo.
  • the residue is then purified by silica chromatography to yield the ethyl ester of the title compound.
  • the ethyl ester is then hydrolyzed to the free acid via treatment with LiOH to arrive upon the title compound.
  • the title compound is formed by reacting a 0.1M solution of the title compound from Example 17 in DMF with tetrazole (1.2 equiv.) in the presence of K 2 CO 3 (2 equiv.) at room temperature for 5-12 hours.
  • the resulting reaction mixture is then extracted with EtOAc, washed with NaHCO 3 , water, and brine, and the washed extract is concentrated in vacuo.
  • the residue is then purified by silica chromatography to yield the ethyl ester of the title compound.
  • the ethyl ester is then hydrolyzed to the free acid via treatment with LiOH to arrive upon the title compound.
  • the title compound is formed by reacting a 0.1M solution of the title compound from Example 17 in DMF with morpholine (1.2 equiv.) in the presence of K 2 CO 3 (2 equiv.) at room temperature for 5-12 hours.
  • the resulting reaction mixture is then extracted with EtOAc, washed with NaHCO 3 , water, and brine, and the washed extract is concentrated in vacuo.
  • the residue is then purified by silica chromatography to yield the ethyl ester of the title compound.
  • the ethyl ester is then hydrolyzed to the free acid via treatment with LiOH to arrive upon the title compound.
  • the title compound is formed by reacting a 0.1M solution of the title compound from Example 17 in DMF with thiophen-3-yl methanol (1.2 equiv.) in the presence of K 2 CO 3 (2 equiv.) at room temperature for 5-12 hours.
  • the resulting reaction mixture is then extracted with EtOAc, washed with NaHCO 3 , water, and brine, and the washed extract is concentrated in vacuo.
  • the residue is then purified by silica chromatography to yield the ethyl ester of the title compound.
  • the ethyl ester is then hydrolyzed to the free acid via treatment with LiOH to arrive upon the title compound.
  • the quinoxalin-2-one of the present example is prepared with 4-Methoxy-benzene-1,2-diamine and (thiophen-2-yl) oxo-acetic acid via the method described in Example 12 to afford 7-Methoxy-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one.
  • the title compound is prepared with 7-Methoxy-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one and the title compound from Example 1 under the Mitsunobu conditions described in Example 2, followed by the reduction of the ethyl ester via treatment with LiOH as elucidated in Example 2.
  • the 2-nitro amide precursor of the present example is prepared with 4-Methoxy-2-nitroaniline (1 equiv.) and 2-(thiophen-2-yl) oxoacetic acid (1 equiv.) in DMF in the presence of DCC at room temperature to 80° C. to arrive at the precursor 2-nitro amide (N-(4-Methoxy-2-nitro-phenyl)-2-oxo-2-thiophen-2-yl-acetamide).
  • the precursor 2-nitro amide is subjected to catalytic hydrogenation conditions (H 2 /Pd/C in MeOH) forming the amine followed by ring closure to form 6-Methoxy-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one.
  • the title compound is prepared with 6-Methoxy-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one and the title compound from Example 1 under the Mitsunobu conditions described in Example 2, followed by the reduction of the ethyl ester via treatment with LiOH as elucidated in Example 2.
  • the quinoxalin-2-one of the present example is prepared with 4,5-Dimethoxy-benzene-1,2-diamine and (thiophen-2-yl) oxo-acetic acid via the method described in Example 12 to afford 6,7-Methoxy-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one.
  • the title compound is prepared with 6,7-Methoxy-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one and the title compound from Example 1 under the Mitsunobu conditions described in Example 2, followed by the reduction of the ethyl ester via treatment with LiOH as elucidated in Example 2.
  • the quinoxalin-2-one of the present example is prepared with 4-cyano-benzene-1,2-diamine and (thiophen-2-yl) oxo-acetic acid via the method described in Example 12 to afford 6-cyano-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one.
  • the title compound is prepared with 6-cyano-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one and the title compound from Example 1 under the Mitsunobu conditions described in Example 2, followed by the reduction of the ethyl ester via treatment with LiOH as elucidated in Example 2.
  • the quinoxalin-2-one of the present example is prepared with 4-cyano-benzene-1,2-diamine and (thiophen-2-yl) oxo-acetic acid via the method described in Example 12 to afford 6-cyano-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one.
  • the cyano compound is then treated with NaN 3 (5 eqiv.), Et 3 N (3 equiv.), in Xylenes in a sealed tube and heated to 140° C. and stirred 12 hours to afford the 6-tetrazol-5-yl-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one after extraction and purification.
  • the title compound is prepared with 6-tetrazol-5-yl-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one and the title compound from Example 1 under the Mitsunobu conditions described in Example 2, followed by the reduction of the ethyl ester via treatment with LiOH as elucidated in Example 2.
  • the quinoxalin-2-one of the present example is prepared with 2,3-diamino pyridine and (thiophen-2-yl) oxo-acetic acid via the method described in Example 12 to afford 2-thiophen-2-yl-4H-pyrido[2,3-b]pyrazin-3-one.
  • the title compound is prepared with 2-thiophen-2-yl-4H-pyrido[2,3-b]pyrazin-3-one and the title compound from Example 1 under the Mitsunobu conditions described in Example 2, followed by the reduction of the ethyl ester via treatment with LiOH as elucidated in Example 2.
  • the quinoxalin-2-one of the present example is prepared with Benzo[1,3]dioxole-5,6-diamine and (thiophen-2-yl) oxo-acetic acid via the method described in Example 12 to afford 7-thiophen-2-yl-5H-1,3-dioxa-5,8-diaza-cyclopenta[b]naphthalen-6-one.
  • the title compound is prepared with 7-thiophen-2-yl-5H-1,3-dioxa-5,8-diaza-cyclopenta[b]naphthalen-6-one and the title compound from Example 1 under the Mitsunobu conditions described in Example 2, followed by the reduction of the ethyl ester via treatment with LiOH as elucidated in Example 2.
  • the quinoxalin-2-one of the present example is prepared with napthylene-2,3-diamine and (thiophen-2-yl) oxo-acetic acid via the method described in Example 12 to afford 3-Thiophen-2-yl-1H-benzo[g]quinoxalin-2-one.
  • the title compound is prepared with 3-Thiophen-2-yl-1H-benzo[g]quinoxalin-2-one and the title compound from Example 1 under the Mitsunobu conditions described in Example 2, followed by the reduction of the ethyl ester via treatment with LiOH as elucidated in Example 2.
  • the quinoxalin-2-one of the present example is prepared with 4-Methanesulfonyl-benzene-1,2-diamine and (thiophen-2-yl) oxo-acetic acid via the method described in Example 12 to afford 6-Methanesulfonyl-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one.
  • the title compound is prepared with 6-Methanesulfonyl-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one and the title compound from Example 1 under the Mitsunobu conditions described in Example 2, followed by the reduction of the ethyl ester via treatment with LiOH as elucidated in Example 2.
  • the quinoxalin-2-one of the present example is prepared with 3,4-Diamino-benzenesulfonic acid and (thiophen-2-yl) oxo-acetic acid via the method described in Example 12 to afford 2-Oxo-3-thiophen-2-yl-1,2-dihydro-quinoxaline-6-sulfonic acid.
  • the title compound is prepared with 2-Oxo-3-thiophen-2-yl-1,2-dihydro-quinoxaline-6-sulfonic acid and the title compound from Example 1 under the Mitsunobu conditions described in Example 2, followed by the reduction of the ethyl ester via treatment with LiOH as elucidated in Example 2.
  • the quinoxalin-2-one of the present example is prepared with (3,4-Diamino-phenyl)-methanol and (thiophen-2-yl) oxo-acetic acid via the method described in Example 12 to afford 6-Hydroxymethyl-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one.
  • the title compound is prepared with 6-Hydroxymethyl-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one and the title compound from Example 1 under the Mitsunobu conditions described in Example 2, followed by the reduction of the ethyl ester via treatment with LiOH as elucidated in Example 2.
  • the quinoxalin-2-one of the present example is prepared first via Swern oxidation with DMSO and (COCl) 2 of 6-Hydroxymethyl-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one to form 2-Oxo-3-thiophen-2-yl-1,2-dihydro-quinoxaline-6-carbaldehyde.
  • the 6-carboxaldehyde compound then undergoes reductive amination with piperidine in acetonitrile in the presence of NaCNBH 3 and acetic acid to afford, after an aqueous workup and purification, 6-Piperidin-1-ylmethyl-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one.
  • the title compound is prepared with 6-Piperidin-1-ylmethyl-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one and the title compound from Example 1 under the Mitsunobu conditions described in Example 2, followed by the reduction of the ethyl ester via treatment with LiOH as elucidated in Example 2.
  • the quinoxalin-2-one of the present example is prepared with 4-Nitro-benzene-1,2-diamine and (thiophen-2-yl) oxo-acetic acid via the method described in Example 12 to afford 6-Nitro-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one.
  • the title compound is prepared with 6-Nitro-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one and the title compound from Example 1 under the Mitsunobu conditions described in Example 2, followed by the reduction of the ethyl ester via treatment with LiOH as elucidated in Example 2.
  • the quinoxalin-2-one of the present example is prepared by reducing 6-nitro-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one of Example 39 with H 2 NNH 2 .H 2 O in the presence of Pd/C in refluxing MeOH.
  • the title compound is prepared with 6-amino-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one and the title compound from Example 1 under the Mitsunobu conditions described in Example 2, followed by the reduction of the ethyl ester via treatment with LiOH as elucidated in Example 2.
  • the quinoxalin-2-one of the present example is prepared by treating 6-amino-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one of Example 40 with phenethyl acid chloride to afford, after workup and purification, N-(2-Oxo-3-thiophen-2-yl-1,2-dihydro-quinoxalin-6-yl)-2-phenyl-acetamide.
  • the title compound is prepared with N-(2-Oxo-3-thiophen-2-yl-1,2-dihydro-quinoxalin-6-yl)-2-phenyl-acetamide and the title compound from Example 1 under the Mitsunobu conditions described in Example 2, followed by the reduction of the ethyl ester via treatment with LiOH as elucidated in Example 2.
  • the quinoxalin-2-one of the present example is prepared with 4-Nitro-benzene-1,2-diamine and (thiophen-2-yl) oxo-acetic acid via the method described in Example 12 to afford 6-Nitro-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one.
  • the title compound is prepared with 6-Nitro-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one and the title compound from Example 1 under the Mitsunobu conditions described in Example 2, followed by the reduction of the ethyl ester via treatment with LiOH as elucidated in Example 2.
  • the quinoxalin-2-one of the present example is prepared with 3,4-diaminophenol (which is prepared by treating 3,4-dinitrophenol with H 2 NNH 2 .H 2 O, Pd/C refluxed in MeOH), and (thiophen-2-yl) oxo-acetic acid via the method described in Example 12 to afford 6-hydroxy-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one.
  • the title compound is prepared with 6-hydroxy-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one and the title compound from Example 1 under the Mitsunobu conditions described in Example 2, followed by the reduction of the ethyl ester via treatment with LiOH as elucidated in Example 2.
  • the quinoxalin-2-one of the present example is prepared treating 6-hydroxy-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one from Example 43 in DMF with bromomethyl benzene in the presence of K 2 CO 3 at a temperature between 25° C. to 80° C.
  • the resulting reaction mixture after workup and purification, affords 6-benzyloxy-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one.
  • the title compound is prepared with 6-benzyloxy-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one and the title compound from Example 1 under the Mitsunobu conditions described in Example 2, followed by the reduction of the ethyl ester via treatment with LiOH as elucidated in Example 2.
  • the quinoxalin-2-one of the present example is prepared with 3,4-Diamino-benzoic acid ethyl ester and (thiophen-2-yl) oxo-acetic acid via the method described in Example 12 to afford 2-Oxo-3-thiophen-2-yl-1,2-dihydro-quinoxaline-6-carboxylic acid ethyl ester.
  • the title compound is prepared with 2-Oxo-3-thiophen-2-yl-1,2-dihydro-quinoxaline-6-carboxylic acid ethyl ester and the title compound from Example 1 under the Mitsunobu conditions described in Example 2, followed by the reduction of the ethyl esters via treatment with LiOH as elucidated in Example 2.
  • the quinoxalin-2-one of the present example is prepared with 2-Oxo-3-thiophen-2-yl-1,2-dihydro-quinoxaline-6-carboxylic acid ethyl ester from Example 45 via the hydrolysis of the ethyl ester according to the procedure of Example 2 to afford the carboxylic acid.
  • the carboxylic acid is then dissolved in DMF in the presence of DCC and triethylamine and to the resulting reaction mixture is added (MeO)NHMe to form Weinreb's amide.
  • the Weinreb's amide is then treated with magnesium benzyl bromide in THF at ⁇ 75° C. to afford, after extraction and purification, the 6-Phenylacetyl-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one.
  • the title compound is prepared with 6-Phenylacetyl-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one and the title compound from Example 1 under the Mitsunobu conditions described in Example 2, followed by the reduction of the ethyl esters via treatment with LiOH as elucidated in Example 2.
  • the quinoxalin-2-one of the present example is prepared with 2-Oxo-3-thiophen-2-yl-1,2-dihydro-quinoxaline-6-carboxylic acid benzylamide from Example 45 via the hydrolysis of the ethyl ester according to the procedure of Example 2 to afford the carboxylic acid.
  • the carboxylic acid is then dissolved in DMF in the presence of DCC and triethylamine and to the resulting reaction mixture is added benzyl amine to afford, after extraction and purification, 2-Oxo-3-thiophen-2-yl-1,2-dihydro-quinoxaline-6-carboxylic acid benzylamide.
  • the title compound is prepared with 2-Oxo-3-thiophen-2-yl-1,2-dihydro-quinoxaline-6-carboxylic acid benzylamide and the title compound from Example 1 under the Mitsunobu conditions described in Example 2, followed by the reduction of the ethyl esters via treatment with LiOH as elucidated in Example 2.
  • the quinoxalin-2-one of the present example is prepared with 6-Phenylacetyl-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one from Example 46 via treatment with H 2 /Pd—C in the presence of acetic acid to form the 6-phenethyl compound.
  • the title compound is prepared with 6-Phenethyl-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one and the title compound from Example 1 under the Mitsunobu conditions described in Example 2, followed by the reduction of the ethyl esters via treatment with LiOH as elucidated in Example 2.
  • the quinoxalin-2-one of the present example is prepared with 4-bromo-2-nitroaniline and (thiophen-2-yl) oxo-acetic acid via the method described in Example 12 to afford 6-bromo-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one.
  • the title compound is prepared with 6-bromo-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one and the title compound from Example 1 under the Mitsunobu conditions described in Example 2 to afford the title compound.
  • the title compound is prepared by reaction of a degassed solution of the title compound from Example 49 (4 mmol), 2-pyrid-3-yl acetylene (4 mmol), and 1 ml of triethylamine and 10 ml of acetonitrile with PdCl 2 (PPh 3 ) 2 (0.2 mmol) and CuI (0.1 mmol).
  • the resulting reaction mixture is degassed and stirred for 5 minutes at room temperature.
  • the reaction is then heated to 90° C. and stirred for 12 hours.
  • the reaction mixture is concentrated in vacuo and purified by silica column to afford the ethyl ester of the title compound.
  • the ethyl ester is then hydrolyzed to the free acid via treatment with LiOH as elucidated in Example 2 to arrive at the title compound.
  • the title compound is prepared by adding to a dry mixture of the title compound from Example 49 (0.068 mmol), imidazole (2 eq.), Cs 2 CO 3 (3 eq.), Xantphos (30 mol %), and Pd(OAc) 2 under nitrogen dioxane.
  • the reaction mixture is then degassed and stirred at 75° C. for 18 hours.
  • the reaction mixture is diluted with DCM, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo.
  • the reaction mixture is then purified via silica column chromatography with 5% MeOH/CHCl 3 to afford the ethyl ester of the title compound.
  • the ethyl ester is then hydrolyzed by the conditions set forth in Example 2 to afford the title compound.
  • the chloroformate reagent 54b is prepared by dissolving 0.045 mmol of cyclopentanol in THF (3 ml) and adding 0.09 mmol of phosgene in toluene (20%). The resulting reaction mixture is stirred at room temperature for 2 hours and the solvent is removed in vacuo. To the residue is added DCM and subsequently concentrated to dryness twice in vacuo yielding chloroformate reagent 54b.
  • the title carbamate is prepared by dissolving residue 54a in 1 ml of THF, adding 0.045 mmol of TEA, and cooling the resulting reaction mixture to 0° C. To this 0° C. reaction mixture is added chloroformate reagent 54b in 3 ml of THF. The resulting reaction mixture is reacted for 2 hours at 0° C., extracted with EtOAc, washed by 1M sodium bicarbonate, water and brine, dried over MgSO 4 , and concentrated in vacuo to dryness. The crude compound is purified by silica column and the ethyl ester is subsequently hydrolyzed by the procedure set forth in Example 2.
  • the title compound is prepared by the method described in Example 54 with the title compound of Example 2 and cyclobutanol.
  • the title compound is prepared by the method described in Example 54 with the title compound of Example 2 and cyclohexanol.
  • the title compound is prepared by the method described in Example 54 with the title compound of Example 2 and (R)-3-hydroxytetrahydrofuran.
  • the title compound is prepared by the method described in Example 54 with the title compound of Example 2 and (S)-3-hydroxytetrahydrofuran.
  • the title compound is prepared with the title compound from Example 2 in 4 ml of a 4M solution of HCl in dioxane and stirring the reaction mixture for 1 hour.
  • the reaction residue is concentrated in vacuo.
  • 4 ml of THF and 0.045 mmol of TEA is added, the mixture is cooled to 0° C., to which is added 0.045 mmol of the cyclopentyl acid chloride.
  • the resulting reaction mixture is stirred for 2 hours at 0° C.
  • the reaction mixture is then extracted with EtOAc, washed with 1M sodium bicarbonate, water and brine, dried over MgSO 4 and concentrated to dryness in vacuo.
  • the crude compound is purified by silica column and the ethyl ester is subsequently hydrolyzed by the procedure set forth in Example 2.
  • the title compound is prepared with the title compound from Example 2 in 4 ml of a 4M solution of HCl in dioxane and stirring for 1 hour.
  • the resulting reaction residue is concentrated in vacuo, dissolved in 4 ml THF, and cooled to 0° C.
  • To the 0° C. solution is added 0.045 mmol of cyclopentyl isocyanate and the resulting reaction mixture is stirred at room temperature for 4 hours.
  • the solution is then extracted with EtOAc, washed with 1% HCl, water and brine, dried over MgSO 4 , and concentrated in vacuo to dryness.
  • the crude compound is purified by silica column and the ethyl ester is subsequently hydrolyzed by the procedure set forth in Example 2.
  • the title compound is prepared with the title compound from Example 2 in 4 ml of a 4M solution of HCl in dioxane and stirring for 1 hour.
  • the resulting reaction residue is concentrated in vacuo, dissolved in 4 ml THF, and cooled to 0° C.
  • To the 0° C. solution is added 0.045 mmol of cyclopentyl isothiocyanate and the resulting reaction mixture is stirred at room temperature for 4 hours.
  • the solution is then extracted with EtOAc, washed with 1% HCl, water and brine, dried over MgSO 4 , and concentrated in vacuo to dryness.
  • the crude compound is purified by silica column and the ethyl ester is subsequently hydrolyzed by the procedure set forth in Example 2.
  • the title compound is prepared with the title compound from Example 2 in 4 ml of a 4M solution of HCl in dioxane and stirring for 1 hour.
  • To the 0° C. solution is added 0.045 mmol of cyclopentyl sulfonyl chloride and the resulting reaction mixture is stirred at 0° C. for 2 hours.
  • the solution is then extracted with EtOAc, washed with 1M sodium bicarbonate, water and brine, dried over MgSO 4 , and concentrated in vacuo to dryness.
  • the crude compound is purified by silica column and the ethyl ester is subsequently hydrolyzed by the procedure set forth in Example 2.
  • the title compound is prepared by adding to a solution of the title compound of Example 54 and phenethyl alcohol 64a in 0.5 ml DCM, is added 1.2 eq. PyBrOP, 4 eq. DIEA, and catalytic amount of DMAP at °0 C. The resulting reaction mixture is stirred for 1 hour at 0° C. and then warmed to room temperature over a period of 4-12 hours. The reaction mixture is purified by silica gel flash chromatography using different ratios of hexanes:EtOAc as elution phase (9:1 ⁇ 5:1 ⁇ 3:1 ⁇ 1:1) to afford the title compound isolated phenethyl ester 64b.
  • esters can be made using the same procedures.
  • the title compound is prepared by adding to a solution of the title compound of Example 54 and phenethyl amine 65a (0.05 ml) in 0.5 ml DMF, EDC (1.2 eq.) and DIEA (4 eq.) at °0 C. The resulting reaction mixture is stirred at 1 hour. Subsequently, the reaction is warmed to room temperature over a period of 4-12 hours. The reaction mixture is purified by silica gel flash chromatography using different ratios of hexanes:EtOAc as elution phase (9:1 ⁇ 5:1 ⁇ 3:1 ⁇ 1:1) to afford title compound phenethyl amide 65b. Other amides can be made via the same procedure.
  • the title compound is prepared by adding to a solution of the title compound of Example 54 and ⁇ -toluenesulfonamide 66a (10 mg) in 0.5 ml DCM, is added 1.2 eq. PyBrOP, 4 eq. DIEA, and catalytic amount of DMAP at °0 C. The resulting reaction mixture is stirred for 1 hour and then allowed to warm to room temperature over a period of 4-12 hours. The reaction mixture is purified by silica gel flash chromatography using different ratios of hexanes:EtOAc as elution phase (9:1 ⁇ 5:1 ⁇ 3:1 ⁇ 1:1) to afford the title compound sulfonamide 66b. Other sulfonamides can be made via the same procedure.
  • the title compound is prepared by adding to a solution of the title compound of Example 54 in 0.5 ml DMF, EDC (1.2 eq.) and DIEA (4 eq.) at °0 C. The resulting reaction mixture is stirred at 1 hour. Subsequently, the reaction is warmed to room temperature over a period of 4-12 hours. The reaction mixture is purified by silica gel flash chromatography to afford hydroxyamide. The hydroyamide is then treated with DIBAL-H at ⁇ 78° C. in THF for 2 hours. The reaction mixture is then diluted with 8 ml EtOAc, washed with water and brine, dried over Na 2 SO 4 , and concentrated in vacuo to yield aldehyde 67a.
  • the crude 67c is purified by silica gel flash chromatography using different ratios of hexanes:EtOAc as elution phase (9:1 ⁇ 5:1 ⁇ 3:1 ⁇ 1:1) to afford the title compound isolated keto acid 67c.
  • Example 67 The title compound is prepared with the title compound keto acid of Example 67 and phenethanol according to the procedure set forth in Example 64.
  • Example 65 The title compound is prepared with the title compound keto acid of Example 67 and phenethyl amine according to the procedure set forth in Example 65.
  • Example 67 The title compound is prepared with the title compound keto acid of Example 67 and ⁇ -toluenesulfonamide according to the procedure set forth in Example 66.
  • the aforementioned amino acid is prepared by adding to a solution of monoallyl ester of malonic acid in dry THF under N 2 at ⁇ 78° C., n-Bu 2 Mg dropwise over a period of 5 min. The resulting suspension is then stirred at room temperature for 1 hour and evaporated to dryness. Solid Mg salt 71b, is dried under vacuum.
  • Glutamic acid derivative 71a is first mixed with 1,1′-carbonyldiimidazole in anhydrous THF and the mixture is stirred at room temperature for 1 hour to activate the free acid moiety. Subsequently, the activated glutamic acid derivative is cannulated into a solution of Mg salt 49b and the reaction mixture obtained is stirred at room temperature for 16 hours. The mixture then is diluted with ethyl acetate and the organic solution is washed with 0.5 N HCl (at 0° C.) and brine, dried and evaporated. The residue obtained is resolved via silica chromatography with a 35-40% ethyl acetate in hexanes eluent system to yield diester 71c.
  • the methyl ester intermediate is then diluted with THF and water, LiOH.H 2 O is added and the resulting mixture is stirred at room temperature for 25 hours, wherein the completion of the hydrolysis is monitored by TLC.
  • the reaction mixture is concentrated under vacuum to remove a majority of the THF and further diluted with methylene chloride.
  • the resulting solution is washed with 1 N HCl, dried with anhydrous Na 2 SO 4 and concentrated under vacuum.
  • the crude product is purified via flash chromatography using a solvent gradient from 100% hexane ⁇ 100% EtOAc as the eluent. (2S)—N-Boc-amino-5-oxo-non-8-enoic acid 71d is obtained.
  • (2S)—N-Boc-amino-5-oxo-non-8-enoic acid 71d is obtained.
  • the modified cyclic peptide precursor mesylate is prepared using the synthetic route detailed in Example 1 using (2S)—N-Boc-amino-5-oxo-non-8-enoic acid 71d in place of Boc-L-2-amino-8-nonenoic acid 1a followed by conversion to the corresponding mesylate via the method described in Example 2.
  • the title compound is prepared with the modified cyclic peptide precursor mesylate formed in 71C and 3-(thiophen-2-yl)-1H-quinoxylin-2-one by the Mitsunobu conditions elucidated in Example 2 followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the method set forth in Example 2.
  • Compound 72d is dissolved in a mixture of tBuOH/acetone/H 2 O (1:1:1) and placed in an ice bath (0° C.). NMMO and O 5 O 4 is consecutively added and the reaction mixture is stirred at room temperature for 4 hours. A majority of the acetone is removed by evaporation under vacuum and then the mixture is extracted with ethyl acetate. The organic layer is further washed with water and brine, dried over anhydrous MgSO 4 and evaporated to dryness. The diol 72e is obtained in high purity after flash column chromatography using 1% ethanol in ethyl acetate as the eluent.
  • the modified cyclic peptide precursor mesylate is prepared using the synthetic route detailed in Example 1 using ((2S, 5R)—N-Boc-2-amino-5-methyl-non-8-enoic acid 72h in place of Boc-L-2-amino-8-nonenoic acid 1a followed by conversion to the corresponding mesylate via the method described in Example 2.
  • the title compound is prepared with the modified cyclic peptide precursor mesylate formed in 72G and 3-(thiophen-2-yl)-1H-quinoxylin-2-one by the Mitsunobu conditions elucidated in Example 2 followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the method set forth in Example 2.
  • Boc-(L)-threonine 73a is partially dissolved in methylene chloride/methanol at 0° C. A solution of diazomethane in diethyl ether is added until yellow, indicating the presence of diazomethane. Upon evaporation of the solvents, crude methyl ester 73b is obtained.
  • the modified cyclic peptide precursor mesylate is prepared using the synthetic route detailed in Example 1 using N-Boc-O-allyl-(L)-threonine 73d in place of Boc-L-2-amino-8-nonenoic acid 1a followed by conversion to the corresponding mesylate via the method described in Example 2.
  • the title compound is prepared with the modified cyclic peptide precursor mesylate formed in 73D and 3-(thiophen-2-yl)-1H-quinoxylin-2-one by the Mitsunobu conditions elucidated in Example 2 followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the method set forth in Example 2.
  • thioester 74c To a solution of thioester 74c is H 2 O/EtOH (3:5 ratio) and aqueous solution of 0.2M NaOH is added and the mixture is stirred at room temperature for 1.5 hours. Allyl iodide is then added and stirring is continued at room temperature for an additional 30 min. The reaction mixture is concentrated to half of its original volume and then extracted with EtOAc. The aqueous layer is acidified to pH ⁇ 3 with cold, aqueous 0.5N HCl and re-extracted with EtOAc. The combined organic layers are washed with brine, dried over anhydrous MgSO 4 and evaporated to dryness under vacuum. The crude reaction mixture contains at least four products; all of the products are isolated after flash chromatography on silica gel, using hexane/EtOAc (gradient from 9:1 to 3:1). The desired product 74d is the least polar compound.
  • the modified cyclic peptide precursor mesylate is prepared using the synthetic route detailed in Example 1 using (2S, 3S)—N-Boc-2 amino-3(mercaptoallyl)butanoic acid 74e in place of Boc-L-2-amino-8-nonenoic acid 1a followed by conversion to the corresponding mesylate via the method described in Example 2.
  • the title compound is prepared with the modified cyclic peptide precursor mesylate formed in 74E and 3-(thiophen-2-yl)-1H-quinoxylin-2-one by the Mitsunobu conditions elucidated in Example 2 followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the method set forth in Example 2.
  • the modified amino acid is prepared by dissolving sodium metaperiodate (1.1 eq.) in water and cooled to 0° C. in an ice bath followed by adding dropwise a solution of compound 75d in dioxane. The resulting reaction mixture is stirred for one hour at 0° C. and 4 hours at 40° C. The reaction mixture is concentrated, water is added, and the mixture is extracted with methylene chloride twice. The combined organic layers are washed with water, brine, dried with anhydrous MgSO 4 and concentrated in vacuo. The methyl ester is then reduced via the method set forth in Example 74D to arrive upon the modified amino acid 75a.
  • S. A. Burrage et al., Tett. Lett., 1998, 39, 2831-2834 which is herein incorporated by reference in its entirety.
  • the modified cyclic peptide precursor mesylate is prepared using the synthetic route detailed in Example 1 using the modified amino acid 75a in place of Boc-L-2-amino-8-nonenoic acid 1a followed by conversion to the corresponding mesylate via the method described in Example 2.
  • the title compound is prepared with the modified cyclic peptide precursor mesylate formed in 75B and 3-(thiophen-2-yl)-1H-quinoxylin-2-one by the Mitsunobu conditions elucidated in Example 2 followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the method set forth in Example 2.
  • the modified amino acid is prepared by dissolving sodium metaperiodate (1.1 eq.) in water and cooled to 0° C. in an ice bath followed by adding dropwise a solution of compound 76d in dioxane. The resulting reaction mixture is stirred for one hour at 0° C. and 4 hours at 40° C. The reaction mixture is concentrated, water is added, and the mixture is extracted with methylene chloride twice. The combined organic layers are washed with water, brine, dried with anhydrous MgSO 4 and concentrated in vacuo. The methyl ester is then reduced via the method set forth in Example 74D to arrive upon the modified amino acid 76a.
  • S. A. Burrage et al., Tett. Lett., 1998, 39, 2831-2834 For further details concerning the sulfur oxidation reaction, see S. A. Burrage et al., Tett. Lett., 1998, 39, 2831-2834.
  • the modified cyclic peptide precursor mesylate is prepared using the synthetic route detailed in Example 1 using the modified amino acid 76a in place of Boc-L-2-amino-8-nonenoic acid 1a followed by conversion to the corresponding mesylate via the method described in Example 2.
  • the title compound is prepared with the modified cyclic peptide precursor mesylate formed in 76B and 3-(thiophen-2-yl)-1H-quinoxylin-2-one by the Mitsunobu conditions elucidated in Example 2 followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the method set forth in Example 2.
  • L-Penicillamine 77a is dissolved in DMF/DMSO (5:1), subsequently, 4-bromopentene and CsOH.H 2 O are added to the mixture and stirring is continued for an additional 12 hours.
  • the DMF is subsequently removed in vacuo, the remaining mixture is diluted with 0.5 N HCl (at 0° C.) to adjust the pH to ⁇ 4-5 and then extracted with 2 portions of EtOAc.
  • the organic phase is washed with brine (2 ⁇ ), dried over MgSO 4 and evaporated to dryness to afford the crude carboxylic acid 77a.
  • the Modified Cyclic peptide precursor mesylate is prepared using the synthetic route detailed in Example 1 using the modified amino acid 77a in place of Boc-L-2-amino-8-nonenoic acid 1a followed by conversion to the corresponding mesylate via the method described in Example 2.
  • the title compound is prepared with the modified cyclic peptide precursor mesylate formed in 77B and 3-(thiophen-2-yl)-1H-quinoxylin-2-one by the Mitsunobu conditions elucidated in Example 2 followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the method set forth in Example 2.
  • Methyl ester 78a is dissolved in THF/MeOH/H 2 O (2:1:1) and LiOH.H 2 O is added. The solution is stirred at room temperature for 2 hours, and is then acidified with 1N HCl to pH ⁇ 3 before the solvents are removed in vacuo to afford the crude (2S)—N-Boc-amino-5-difluoro-non-8-enoic acid 78b.
  • the modified cyclic peptide precursor mesylate is prepared using the synthetic route detailed in Example 1 using crude (2S)—N-Boc-amino-5-difluoro-non-8-enoic acid 78b in place of Boc-L-2-amino-8-nonenoic acid 1a followed by conversion to the corresponding mesylate via the method described in Example 2.
  • the title compound is prepared with the modified cyclic peptide precursor mesylate formed in 78C and 3-(thiophen-2-yl)-1H-quinoxylin-2-one by the Mitsunobu conditions elucidated in Example 2 followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the method set forth in Example 2.
  • Methyl ester 79b is dissolved in THF/MeOH/H 2 O (2:1:1) and LiOH.H 2 O is added. The solution is stirred at room temperature for 2 hours, and is then acidified with 1N HCl to pH ⁇ 3 before the solvents are removed in vacuo to afford the crude (2S)—N-Boc-amino-5-difluoro-non-8-enoic acid 79c.
  • the modified cyclic peptide precursor mesylate is prepared using the synthetic route detailed in Example 1 using crude (2S)—N-Boc-amino-5-monofluoro-non-8-enoic acid 79b in place of Boc-L-2-amino-8-nonenoic acid 1a followed by conversion to the corresponding mesylate via the method described in Example 2.
  • the title compound is prepared with the modified cyclic peptide precursor mesylate formed in 79C and 3-(thiophen-2-yl)-1H-quinoxylin-2-one by the Mitsunobu conditions elucidated in Example 2 followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the method set forth in Example 2.
  • the saturated cyclic peptide precursor is prepared by catalytic reduction of the cyclic peptide precursor of Example 1 with Pd/C in MeOH in the presence of H 2 .
  • the title compound is prepared with the saturated cyclic peptide precursor mesylate formed in 80A and 3-(thiophen-2-yl)-1H-quinoxylin-2-one by the Mitsunobu conditions elucidated in Example 2 followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the method set forth in Example 2.
  • the compounds of the present invention exhibit potent inhibitory properties against the HCV NS3 protease.
  • the following examples elucidate assays in which the compounds of the present invention are tested for anti-HCV effects.
  • HCV protease activity and inhibition is assayed using an internally quenched fluorogenic substrate.
  • a DABCYL and an EDANS group are attached to opposite ends of a short peptide. Quenching of the EDANS fluorescence by the DABCYL group is relieved upon proteolytic cleavage. Fluorescence was measured with a Molecular Devices Fluoromax (or equivalent) using an excitation wavelength of 355 nm and an emission wavelength of 485 nm.
  • the assay is run in Corning white half-area 96-well plates (VWR 29444-312 [Corning 3693]) with full-length NS3 HCV protease 1b tethered with NS4A cofactor (final enzyme concentration 1 to 15 nM).
  • the assay buffer is complemented with 10 ⁇ M NS4A cofactor Pep 4A (Anaspec 25336 or in-house, MW 1424.8).
  • RET S1 (Ac-Asp-Glu-Asp (EDANS)-Glu-Glu-Abu-[COO]Ala-Ser-Lys-(DABCYL)-NH 2 , AnaSpec 22991, MW 1548.6) is used as the fluorogenic peptide substrate.
  • the assay buffer contained 50 mM Hepes at pH 7.5, 30 mM NaCl and 10 mM BME. The enzyme reaction is followed over a 30 minutes time course at room temperature in the absence and presence of inhibitors.
  • HCV Inh 1 (Anaspec 25345, MW 796.8) Ac-Asp-Glu-Met-Glu-Glu-Cys-OH, [ ⁇ 20° C.] and HCV Inh 2 (Anaspec 25346, MW 913.1) Ac-Asp-Glu-Dif-Cha-Cys-OH, were used as reference compounds.
  • HCV Replicon RNA Quantification of HCV Replicon RNA in Cell Lines (HCV Cell Based Assay)
  • RNA lines including Huh-11-7 or Huh 9-13, harboring HCV replicons (Lohmann, et al Science 285:110-113, 1999) are seeded at 5 ⁇ 10 3 cells/well in 96 well plates and fed media containing DMEM (high glucose), 10% fetal calf serum, penicillin-streptomycin and non-essential amino acids. Cells are incubated in a 5% CO 2 incubator at 37° C. At the end of the incubation period, total RNA is extracted and purified from cells using Qiagen Rneasy 96 Kit (Catalog No. 74182).
  • primers specific for HCV mediate both the reverse transcription of the HCV RNA and the amplification of the cDNA by polymerase chain reaction (PCR) using the Taq-Man One-Step RT-PCR Master Mix Kit (Applied Biosystems catalog no. 4309169).
  • PCR polymerase chain reaction
  • the nucleotide sequences of the RT-PCR primers, which are located in the NS5B region of the HCV genome, are the following: HCV Forward primer “RBNS5bfor” 5′GCTGCGGCCTGTCGAGCT: HCV Reverse primer “RBNS5Brev”: 5′CAAGGTCGTCTCCGCATAC
  • Detection of the RT-PCR product was accomplished using the Applied Biosystems (ABI) Prism 7700 Sequence Detection System (SDS) that detects the fluorescence that is emitted when the probe, which is labeled with a fluorescence reporter dye and a quencher dye, is processed during the PCR reaction.
  • SDS Sequence Detection System
  • the increase in the amount of fluorescence is measured during each cycle of PCR and reflects the increasing amount of RT-PCR product.
  • quantification is based on the threshold cycle, where the amplification plot crosses a defined fluorescence threshold. Comparison of the threshold cycles of the sample with a known standard provides a highly sensitive measure of relative template concentration in different samples (ABI User Bulletin #2 Dec. 11, 1997).
  • the data is analyzed using the ABI SDS program version 1.7.
  • the relative template concentration can be converted to RNA copy numbers by employing a standard curve of HCV RNA standards with known copy number (ABI User Bulletin #2 Dec. 11, 1997).
  • the RT-PCR product was detected using the following labeled probe: 5′ FAM-CGAAGCTCCAGGACTGCACGATGCT-TAMRA
  • the RT reaction is performed at 48° C. for 30 minutes followed by PCR.
  • Thermal cycler parameters used for the PCR reaction on the ABI Prism 7700 Sequence Detection System were: one cycle at 95° C., 10 minutes followed by 35 cycles each of which included one incubation at 95° C. for 15 seconds and a second incubation for 60° C. for 1 minute.
  • RT-PCR is performed on the cellular messenger RNA glyceraldehydes-3-phosphate dehydrogenase (GAPDH).
  • GAPDH messenger RNA glyceraldehydes-3-phosphate dehydrogenase
  • the GAPDH copy number is very stable in the cell lines used.
  • GAPDH RT-PCR is performed on the same exact RNA sample from which the HCV copy number is determined.
  • the GAPDH primers and probes, as well as the standards with which to determine copy number, are contained in the ABI Pre-Developed TaqMan Assay Kit (catalog no. 431 0884E).
  • the ratio of HCV/GAPDH RNA is used to calculate the activity of compounds evaluated for inhibition of HCV RNA replication.

Abstract

The present invention relates to compounds of Formula I or II, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester, or prodrug, thereof:
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00001

which inhibit serine protease activity, particularly the activity of hepatitis C virus (HCV) NS3-NS4A protease. Consequently, the compounds of the present invention interfere with the life cycle of the hepatitis C virus and are also useful as antiviral agents. The present invention further relates to pharmaceutical compositions comprising the aforementioned compounds for administration to a subject suffering from HCV infection. The invention also relates to methods of treating an HCV infection in a subject by administering a pharmaceutical composition comprising the compounds of the present invention.

Description

CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS
This applications claims benefit of U.S. provisional application 60/509,071 (conversion of U.S. Ser. No. 10/418,759) filed Apr. 18, 2003, the entire contents of which is herein incorporated by reference.
TECHNICAL FIELD
The present invention relates to novel macrocycles having activity against the hepatitis C virus (HCV) and useful in the treatment of HCV infections. More particularly, the invention relates to macrocyclic compounds, compositions containing such compounds and methods for using the same, as well as processes for making such compounds.
BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
HCV is the principal cause of non-A, non-B hepatitis and is an increasingly severe public health problem both in the developed and developing world. It is estimated that the virus infects over 200 million people worldwide, surpassing the number of individuals infected with the human immunodeficiency virus (HIV) by nearly five fold. HCV infected patients, due to the high percentage of individuals inflicted with chronic infections, are at an elevated risk of developing cirrhosis of the liver, subsequent hepatocellular carcinoma and terminal liver disease. HCV is the most prevalent cause of hepatocellular cancer and cause of patients requiring liver transplantations in the western world.
There are considerable barriers to the development of anti-HCV therapeutics, which include, but are not limited to, the persistence of the virus, the genetic diversity of the virus during replication in the host, the high incident rate of the virus developing drug-resistant mutants, and the lack of reproducible infectious culture systems and small-animal models for HCV replication and pathogenesis. In a majority of cases, given the mild course of the infection and the complex biology of the liver, careful consideration must be given to antiviral drugs, which are likely to have significant side effects.
Only two approved therapies for HCV infection are currently available. The original treatment regimen generally involves a 3-12 month course of intravenous interferon-α (IFN-α), while a new approved second-generation treatment involves co-treatment with IFN-α and the general antiviral nucleoside mimics like ribavirin. Both of these treatments suffer from interferon related side effects as well as low efficacy against HCV infections. There exists a need for the development of effective antiviral agents for treatment of HCV infection due to the poor tolerability and disappointing efficacy of existing therapies.
In a patient population where the majority of individuals are chronically infected and asymptomatic and the prognoses are unknown, an effective drug would desirably possess significantly fewer side effects than the currently available treatments. The hepatitis C non-structural protein-3 (NS3) is a proteolytic enzyme required for processing of the viral polyprotein and consequently viral replication. Despite the huge number of viral variants associated with HCV infection, the active site of the NS3 protease remains highly conserved thus making its inhibition an attractive mode of intervention. Recent success in the treatment of HIV with protease inhibitors supports the concept that the inhibition of NS3 is a key target in the battle against HCV.
HCV is a flaviridae type RNA virus. The HCV genome is enveloped and contains a single strand RNA molecule composed of circa 9600 base pairs. It encodes a polypeptide comprised of approximately 3010 amino acids.
The HCV polyprotein is processed by viral and host peptidase into 10 discreet peptides which serve a variety of functions. There are three structural proteins, C, E1 and E2. The P7 protein is of unknown function and is comprised of a highly variable sequence. There are six non-structural proteins. NS2 is a zinc-dependent metalloproteinase that functions in conjunction with a portion of the NS3 protein. NS3 incorporates two catalytic functions (separate from its association with NS2): a serine protease at the N-terminal end, which requires NS4A as a cofactor, and an ATP-ase-dependent helicase function at the carboxyl terminus. NS4A is a tightly associated but non-covalent cofactor of the serine protease.
The NS3.4A protease is responsible for cleaving four sites on the viral polyprotein. The NS3-NS4A cleavage is autocatalytic, occurring in cis. The remaining three hydrolyses, NS4A-NS4B, NS4B-NS5A and NS5A-NS5B all occur in trans. NS3 is a serine protease which is structurally classified as a chymotrypsin-like protease. While the NS serine protease possesses proteolytic activity by itself, the HCV protease enzyme is not an efficient enzyme in terms of catalyzing polyprotein cleavage. It has been shown that a central hydrophobic region of the NS4A protein is required for this enhancement. The complex formation of the NS3 protein with NS4A seems necessary to the processing events, enhancing the proteolytic efficacy at all of the sites.
A general strategy for the development of antiviral agents is to inactivate virally encoded enzymes, including NS3, that are essential for the replication of the virus. Current efforts directed toward the discovery of NS3 protease inhibitors were reviewed by S. Tan, A. Pause, Y. Shi, N. Sonenberg, Hepatitis C Therapeutics: Current Status and Emerging Strategies, Nature Rev. Drug Discov., 1, 867-881 (2002). Other patent disclosures describing the synthesis of HCV protease inhibitors are: WO 00/59929 (2000); WO 99/07733 (1999); WO 00/09543 (2000); WO 99/50230 (1999); U.S. Pat. No. 5,861,297 (1999); and US2002/0037998 (2002).
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
The present invention relates to novel macrocyclic compounds and methods of treating a hepatitis C infection in a subject in need of such therapy with said macrocyclic compounds. The present invention further relates to pharmaceutical compositions comprising the compounds of the present invention, or pharmaceutically acceptable salts, esters, or prodrugs thereof, in combination with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or excipient.
In one embodiment of the present invention there are disclosed compounds represented by Formulas I and II, or pharmaceutically acceptable salts, esters, or prodrugs thereof:
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00002

Wherein
A is independently selected from hydrogen; —(C═O)—O—R1, —(C═O)—R2, —C(═O)—NH—R2, —C(═S)—NH—R2, or —S(O)2—R2;
G is independently selected from —OH, —O—(C1-C12 alkyl), —NHS(O)2—R1, —(C═O)—R2, —(C═O)—O—R1, or —(C═O)—NH—R2;
L is independently selected from —S—, —SCH2—, —SCH2CH2—, —S(O)2—, —S(O)2CH2CH2—, —S(O)—, —S(O)CH2CH2—, —O—, —OCH2—, —OCH2CH2—, —(C═O)—CH2—, —CH(CH3)CH2—, —CFHCH2—, or —CF2CH2—;
X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached form a cyclic moiety selected from aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, or substituted heteroaryl;
W is absent, or independently selected from —O—, —S—, —NH—, —C(O)NR1— or —NR1—;
Z is independently selected from hydrogen, —CN, —SCN, —NCO, —NCS, —NHNH2, —N3, halogen, —R4, —C3-C12 cycloalkyl, substituted —C3-C12 cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocycloalkyl, substituted heterocycloalkyl, or —NH—N═CH (R1);
Each R1 is independently selected from hydrogen, C1-C6 alkyl, substituted C1-C6 alkyl, C1-C6 alkenyl, substituted C1-C6 alkenyl, C1-C6 alkynyl, substituted C1-C6 alkynyl, C3-C12 cycloalkyl, substituted C3-C12 cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, or substituted heterocycloalkyl;
Each R2 is independently selected from hydrogen, C1-C6 alkyl, C1-C6 alkyl, substituted C1-C6 alkyl, C1-C6 alkenyl, substituted C1-C6 alkenyl, C1-C6 alkynyl, substituted C1-C6 alkynyl, C3-C12 cycloalkyl, substituted C3-C12 cycloalkyl, alkylamino, dialkylamino, arylamino, diarylamino, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, or substituted heterocycloalkyl;
Each R4 is independently selected from:
    • (i) —C1-C6 alkyl containing 0, 1, 2, or 3 heteroatoms selected from O, S, or N, optionally substituted with one or more substituent selected from halogen, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, or substituted heteroaryl,
    • (ii) —C2-C6 alkenyl containing 0, 1, 2, or 3 heteroatoms selected from O, S, or N, optionally substituted with one or more substituent selected from halogen, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, or substituted heteroaryl;
    • (iii) —C2-C6 alkynyl containing 0, 1, 2, or 3 heteroatoms selected from O, S, or N, optionally substituted with one or more substituent selected from halogen, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, or substituted heteroaryl;
R5 and R6 are each independently selected from hydrogen or methyl;
j=0, 1, 2, 3, or 4;
m=0, 1, or 2; and
s=0, 1 or 2.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION
A first embodiment of the invention is a compound represented by Formula I as described above, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester or prodrug thereof, alone or in combination with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or excipient.
A second embodiment of the invention is a compound represented by Formula II as described above, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester or prodrug thereof, alone or in combination with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or excipient.
Representative subgenera of the invention include, but are not limited to:
    • A compound of Formula III:
      Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00003
    •  wherein R7 and R8 are independently selected from R4; and
    • A compound of Formula IV:
      Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00004
    •  wherein R7 and R8 are independently selected from R4;
    • A compound of Formula I, II, III, or IV wherein W is absent and Z is thiophenyl;
    • A compound of Formula I, II, III or IV wherein W is —CH═CH— and Z is thiophenyl;
    • A compound of Formula I, III, or IV wherein L is absent, R5 and R6 are hydrogen, j=3, m=1, and s=1;
Representative compounds of the invention include, but are not limited to, the following compounds:
    • Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
    • Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=2-(formamido)-thiazol-4-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
    • Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=ethyl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
    • Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=phenyl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
    • Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=4-methoxyphenyl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
    • Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=4-ethoxyphenyl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
    • Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=5-bromothiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
    • Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=2-pyrid-3-yl ethylenyl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
    • Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=3,4-Dimethoxy-phenyl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
    • Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=2-thiophen-2-yl ethylenyl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
    • Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, Z=indole-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
    • Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=1H-indol-3-yl methyl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
    • Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=furan-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
    • Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=1H-benzoimidazol-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
    • Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=1H-imidazol-2-ylmethyl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
    • Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OEt, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=chloro, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
    • Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, Z=thiophen-3-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
    • Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=2-pyrid-3-yl acetylenyl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
    • Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=2,3-dihydrobenzofuran-5-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
    • Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W=—NH—, Z=propargyl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
    • Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W=—N (ethyl)-, Z=benzyl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
    • Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W=—NH—, Z=pyrid-3-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
    • Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L═absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=tetrazolyl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
    • Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=morpholino, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
    • Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W=—O—, Z=thiophen-3-yl-methyl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
    • Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are
      Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00005
    •  W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
    • Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are
      Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00006
    •  W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
    • Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are
      Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00007
    •  W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
    • Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are
      Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00008
    •  W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
    • Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are
      Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00009
    •  W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
    • Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are
      Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00010
    •  W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
    • Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are
      Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00011
    •  W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
    • Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are
      Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00012
    •  W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
    • Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are
      Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00013
    •  W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
    • Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y, taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are
      Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00014
    •  W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
    • Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are
      Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00015
    •  W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
    • Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are
      Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00016
    •  W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
    • Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are
      Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00017
    •  W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
    • Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are
      Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00018
    •  W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
    • Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are
      Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00019
    •  W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
    • Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are
      Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00020
    •  W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
    • Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are
      Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00021
    •  W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
    • Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are
      Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00022
    •  W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
    • Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are
      Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00023
    •  W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
    • Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are
      Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00024
    •  W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
    • Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are
      Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00025
    •  W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
    • Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are
      Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00026
    •  W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
    • Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OEt, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are
      Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00027
    •  W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
    • Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are
      Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00028
    •  W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
    • Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are
      Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00029
    •  W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
    • Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are
      Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00030
    •  W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, R5=R6=hydrogen;
    • Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are
      Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00031
    •  W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, R5=R6=hydrogen;
    • Compound of Formula I, wherein A=—(C═O)—O—R1, wherein R1=cyclopentyl, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
    • Compound of Formula I, wherein A=—(C═O)—O—R1, wherein R1=cyclobutyl, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
    • Compound of Formula I, wherein A=—(C═O)—O—R1, wherein R1=cyclohexyl, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
    • Compound of Formula I, wherein A=—(C═O)—O—R1, wherein R1=
      Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00032
    •  G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
    • Compound of Formula I, wherein A=—(C═O)—O—R1, wherein R1=
      Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00033
    •  G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
    • Compound of Formula I, wherein A=—(C═O)—O—R1, wherein R1=
      Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00034
    •  G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
    • Compound of Formula I, wherein A=—(C═O)—R1, wherein R1=cyclopentyl, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
    • Compound of Formula I, wherein A=—(C═O)—NH—R1, wherein R1=cyclopentyl, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R=hydrogen;
    • Compound of Formula I, wherein A=—(C═S)—NH—R1, wherein R1=cyclopentyl, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6 hydrogen;
    • Compound of Formula I, wherein A=—S(O)2—R1, wherein R1=cyclopentyl, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
    • Compound of Formula I, wherein A=—(C═O)—O—R1, R1=cyclopentyl, G=—O-phenethyl, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
    • Compound of Formula I, wherein A=—(C═O)—O—R1, R1=cyclopentyl, G=—NH-phenethyl, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
    • Compound of Formula I, wherein A=—(C═O)—O—R1, R1=cyclopentyl, G=—NHS(O)2-phenethyl L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
    • Compound of Formula I, wherein A=—(C═O)—O—R1, R1=cyclopentyl, G=—(C═O)—OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
    • Compound of Formula I, wherein A=—(C═O)—O—R1, R1=cyclopentyl, G=—(C═O)—O-phenethyl, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
    • Compound of Formula I, wherein A=—(C═O)—O—R1, R1=cyclopentyl, G=—(C═O)—NH-phenethyl, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
    • Compound of Formula I, wherein A=—(C═O)—O—R1, R1=cyclopentyl, G=—(C═O)—NH—S(O)2-benzyl, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
    • Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=—(C═O)CH2—, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
    • Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=—CH(CH3)CH2—, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
    • Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=—O—, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, R5=methyl, and R6=hydrogen;
    • Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=—S—, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, R5=methyl, and R6=hydrogen;
    • Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=—S(O)—, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, R5=methyl, and R6=hydrogen;
    • Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=—S(O)2, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, R5=methyl, and R6=hydrogen;
    • Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=—SCH2CH2—, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, R5=methyl, and R6=hydrogen;
    • Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=CF2CH2, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
    • Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=—CHFCH2—, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen; and
    • Compound of Formula II, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen.
Additional compounds of the invention are those of Formula V:
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00035

wherein A and B are as defined in the A-Matrix and B-Matrix tables herein. The A-Matrix and B-Matrix tables below set forth substituents present on the core ring structure shown in formula (V) which when one A substituent is selected from the A-Matrix and one B substituent is selected from the B-Matrix an additional compound of the invention is described. Compounds are formed by selecting any element from the A-Matrix with any element from the B-matrix to arrive upon an A, B-substituted macrocycle of formula V. For example,a compound of Formula V, wherein A is element 101 from the A-Matrix and B is element 301 from the B-Matrix, is designated by the number 101301.
Thus, the invention includes compounds of the formula V and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, wherein A is any element in the A-Matrix and B is any element of the B-Matrix.
Specific compounds include, but are not limited to, the following: 101301; 101358; 101306; 101302; 101322; 101311; 101325; 101303; 103304; 101326; 101327; 101330; 101331; 101332; 101335; 101336; 101348; 101340; 101334; 101348; 101359; 101328; 101360; 101361; 101362; 101329; 105301; 123301; 112301; 124301; 109301; 122301; 111301; 114301; 107301; 104301; 101324; 101304; 101355; 101356; 101307; 101357; 101347; 101352; 110301; 101364; 101308; 101309; 128301; 124301; 113301; 143301; 115301; 101367; 101368; 101323; 101317; 108301; 101318; 101319; 101351; 101353; 101349; 118301; 120301; 101333; 101320; 101321; 129301; 121301; 117301; 123352; 101347; 101350; 107365; 101313; 145301; 101366; 101354; 101343; 101314; 101339; 101341; 107341; 114341; 106301; 144301; 126301; 127301; 130301; 116301; 102301; 140301; 141301; 139301; 138301; 142301; 137301; 135301; 134301; 133301; 131301; 132301; 136301; 101345; 101344; 101342; 105316; 107316; 101315; 101346; 101337; 116365; and 101338.
A-Matrix
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00036
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00037
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00038
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00039
101 102 103 104
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00040
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00041
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00042
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00043
105 106 107 108
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00044
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00045
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00046
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00047
109 110 111 112
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00048
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00049
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00050
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00051
113 114 115 116
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00052
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00053
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00054
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00055
117 118 119 120
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00056
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00057
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00058
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00059
121 122 123 124
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00060
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00061
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00062
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00063
125 126 127 128
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00064
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00065
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00066
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00067
129 130 131 132
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00068
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00069
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00070
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00071
133 134 135 136
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00072
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00073
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00074
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00075
137 138 139 140
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00076
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00077
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00078
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00079
141 142 143 144
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00080
145
B-Matrix
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00081
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00082
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00083
301 302 303
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00084
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00085
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00086
304 305 306
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00087
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00088
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00089
307 308 309
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00090
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00091
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00092
310 311 312
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00093
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00094
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00095
313 314 315
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00096
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00097
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00098
316 317 318
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00099
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00100
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00101
319 320 321
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00102
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00103
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00104
322 323 324
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00105
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00106
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00107
325 326 327
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00108
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00109
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00110
328 329 330
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00111
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00112
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00113
331 332 333
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00114
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00115
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00116
334 335 336
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00117
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00118
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00119
337 338 339
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00120
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00121
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00122
340 341 342
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00123
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00124
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00125
343 344 345
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00126
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00127
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00128
346 347 348
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00129
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00130
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00131
349 350 351
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00132
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00133
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00134
352 353 354
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00135
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00136
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00137
355 356 357
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00138
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00139
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00140
358 359 360
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00141
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00142
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00143
361 362 363
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00144
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00145
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00146
364 365 366
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00147
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00148
367 368
According to an alternate embodiment, the pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention may further contain other anti-HCV agents. Examples of anti-HCV agents include, but are not limited to, α-interferon, β-interferon, ribavirin, and amantadine. For further details see S. Tan, A. Pause, Y. Shi, N. Sonenberg, Hepatitis C Therapeutics: Current Status and Emerging Strategies, Nature Rev. Drug Discov., 1, 867-881 (2002); WO 00/59929 (2000); WO 99/07733 (1999); WO 00/09543 (2000); WO 99/50230 (1999); U.S. Pat. No. 5,861,297 (1999); and US2002/0037998 (2002) which are herein incorporated by reference in their entirety.
According to an additional embodiment, the pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention may further contain other HCV protease inhibitors.
According to yet another embodiment, the pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention may further comprise inhibitor(s) of other targets in the HCV life cycle, including, but not limited to, helicase, polymerase, metalloprotease, and internal ribosome entry site (IRES).
According to a further embodiment, the present invention includes methods of treating hepatitis C infections in a subject in need of such treatment by administering to said subject an anti-HCV virally effective amount or an inhibitory amount of the pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention.
An additional embodiment of the present invention includes methods of treating biological samples by contacting the biological samples with the compounds of the present invention.
Yet a further aspect of the present invention is a process of making any of the compounds delineated herein employing any of the synthetic means delineated herein.
Definitions
Listed below are definitions of various terms used to describe this invention. These definitions apply to the terms as they are used throughout this specification and claims, unless otherwise limited in specific instances, either individually or as part of a larger group.
The terms “C1-C3 alkyl,” “C1-C6 alkyl” or “C1-C12 alkyl,” as used herein, refer to saturated, straight- or branched-chain hydrocarbon radicals containing between one and three, one and twelve, or one and six carbon atoms, respectively. Examples of C1-C3 alkyl radicals include methyl, ethyl, propyl and isopropyl radicals; examples of C1-C6 alkyl radicals include, but are not limited to, methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, tert-butyl, neopentyl and n-hexyl radicals; and examples of C1-C12 alkyl radicals include, but are not limited to, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, n-hexyl, octyl, decyl, dodecyl radicals.
The term “substituted alkyl,” as used herein, refers to a “C2-C12 alkyl” or “C1-C6 alkyl” group substituted by independent replacement of one, two or three of the hydrogen atoms thereon with F, Cl, Br, I, OH, NO2, CN, C1-C6-alkyl-OH, C(O)—C1-C6-alkyl, C(O)H, OCH2—C3-C12-cycloalkyl, C(O)-aryl, C(O)-heteroaryl, CO2-alkyl, CO2-aryl, CO2-heteroaryl, CONH2, CONH—C1-C6-alkyl, CONH-aryl, CONH-heteroaryl, OC(O)—C1-C6-alkyl, OC(O)-aryl, OC(O)-heteroaryl, OCO2-alkyl, OCO2-aryl, OCO2-heteroaryl, OCONH2, OCONH—C1-C6-alkyl, OCONH-aryl, OCONH-heteroaryl, NHC(O)H, NHC(O)—C1-C6-alkyl, NHC(O)-aryl, NHC(O)-heteroaryl, NHCO2-alkyl, NHCO2-aryl, NHCO2-heteroaryl, NHCONH2, NHCONH—C1-C6-alkyl, NHCONH-aryl, NHCONH-heteroaryl, SO2—C1-C6-alkyl, SO2-aryl, SO2-heteroaryl, SO2NH2, SO2NH—C1-C6-alkyl, SO2NH-aryl, SO2NH-heteroaryl, C1-C6-alkyl, C3-C12-cycloalkyl, CF3, CH2CF3, CHCl2, CH2NH2, CH2SO2CH3, C1-C6 alkyl, halo alkyl, C3-C12 cycloalkyl, substituted C3-C12 cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, benzyl, benzyloxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, C1-C6-alkoxy, methoxymethoxy, methoxyethoxy, amino, benzylamino, arylamino, heteroarylamino, C1-C3-alkylamino, di-C1-C3-alkylamino, thio, aryl-thio, heteroarylthio, benzyl-thio, C1-C6-alkyl-thio, or methylthiomethyl.
The terms “C2-C12 alkenyl” or “C2-C6 alkenyl,” as used herein, denote a monovalent group derived from a hydrocarbon moiety containing from two to twelve or two to six carbon atoms having at least one carbon-carbon double bond by the removal of a single hydrogen atom. Alkenyl groups include, but are not limited to, for example, ethenyl, propenyl, butenyl, 1-methyl-2-buten-1-yl, and the like.
The term “substituted alkenyl,” as used herein, refers to a “C2-C12 alkenyl” or “C1-C6 alkenyl” group substituted by independent replacement of one, two or three of the hydrogen atoms thereon with F, Cl, Br, I, OH, NO2, CN, C1-C6-alkyl-OH, C(O)—C1-C6-alkyl, OCH2—C3-C12-cycloalkyl, C(O)H, C(O)-aryl, C(O)-heteroaryl, CO2-alkyl, CO2-aryl, CO2-heteroaryl, CONH2, CONH—C1-C6-alkyl, CONH-aryl, CONH-heteroaryl, OC(O)—C1-C6-alkyl, OC(O)-aryl, OC(O)-heteroaryl, OCO2-alkyl, OCO2-aryl, OCO2-heteroaryl, OCONH2, OCONH—C1-C6-alkyl, OCONH-aryl, OCONH-heteroaryl, NHC(O)H, NHC(O)—C1-C6-alkyl, NHC(O)-aryl, NHC(O)-heteroaryl, NHCO2-alkyl, NHCO2-aryl, NHCO2-heteroaryl, NHCONH2, NHCONH—C1-C6-alkyl, NHCONH-aryl, NHCONH-heteroaryl, SO2—C1-C6-alkyl, SO2-aryl, SO2-heteroaryl, SO2NH2, SO2NH—C1-C6-alkyl, SO2NH-aryl, SO2NH-heteroaryl, C1-C6-alkyl, C3-C12-cycloalkyl, CF3, CH2CF3, CHCl2, CH2NH2, CH2SO2CH3, C1-C6 alkyl, halo alkyl, C3-C12 cycloalkyl, substituted C3-C12 cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, benzyl, benzyloxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, C1-C6-alkoxy, methoxymethoxy, methoxyethoxy, amino, benzylamino, arylamino, heteroarylamino, C1-C3-alkylamino, di-C1-C3-alkylamino, thio, aryl-thio, heteroarylthio, benzyl-thio, C1-C6-alkyl-thio, or methylthiomethyl.
The terms “C1-C12 alkynyl” or “C1-C6 alkynyl,” as used herein, denote a monovalent group derived from a hydrocarbon moiety containing from two to twelve or two to six carbon atoms having at least one carbon-carbon triple bond by the removal of a single hydrogen atom. Representative alkynyl groups include, but are not limited to, for example, ethynyl, 1-propynyl, 1-butynyl, and the like.
The term “substituted alkynyl,” as used herein, refers to a “C2-C12 alkynyl” or “C1-C6 alkynyl” group substituted by independent replacement of one, two or three of the hydrogen atoms thereon with F, Cl, Br, I, OH, NO2, CN, C1-C6-alkyl-OH, C(O)—C1-C6-alkyl, OCH2—C3-C12-cycloalkyl, C(O)H, C(O)-aryl, C(O)-heteroaryl, CO2-alkyl, CO2-aryl, CO2-heteroaryl, CONH2, CONH—C1-C6-alkyl, CONH-aryl, CONH-heteroaryl, OC(O)—C1-C6-alkyl, OC(O)-aryl, OC(O)-heteroaryl, OCO2-alkyl, OCO2-aryl, OCO2-heteroaryl, OCONH2, OCONH—C1-C6-alkyl, OCONH-aryl, OCONH-heteroaryl, NHC(O)H, NHC(O)—C1-C6-alkyl, NHC(O)-aryl, NHC(O)-heteroaryl, NHCO2-alkyl, NHCO2-aryl, NHCO2-heteroaryl, NHCONH2, NHCONH—C1-C6-alkyl, NHCONH-aryl, NHCONH-heteroaryl, SO2—C1-C6-alkyl, SO2-aryl, SO2-heteroaryl, SO2NH2, SO2NH—C1-C6-alkyl, SO2NH-aryl, SO2NH-heteroaryl, C1-C6-alkyl, C3-C12-cycloalkyl, CF3, CH2CF3, CHCl2, CH2NH2, CH2SO2CH3, C1-C6 alkyl, halo alkyl, C3-C12 cycloalkyl, substituted C3-C12 cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, benzyl, benzyloxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, C1-C6-alkoxy, methoxymethoxy, methoxyethoxy, amino, benzylamino, arylamino, heteroarylamino, C1-C3-alkylamino, di-C1-C3-alkylamino, thio, aryl-thio, heteroarylthio, benzyl-thio, C1-C6-alkyl-thio, or methylthiomethyl.
The term “C1-C6 alkoxy,” as used herein, refers to a C1-C6 alkyl group, as previously defined, attached to the parent molecular moiety through an oxygen atom. Examples of C1-C6-alkoxy include, but are not limited to, methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, isopropoxy, n-butoxy, tert-butoxy, neopentoxy and n-hexoxy.
The terms “halo” and “halogen,” as used herein, refer to an atom selected from fluorine, chlorine, bromine and iodine.
The term “aryl,” as used herein, refers to a mono- or bicyclic carbocyclic ring system having one or two aromatic rings including, but not limited to, phenyl, naphthyl, tetrahydronaphthyl, indanyl, idenyl and the like.
The term “substituted aryl,” as used herein, refers to an aryl group, as defined herein, substituted by independent replacement of one, two or three of the hydrogen atoms thereon with F, Cl, Br, I, OH, NO2, CN, C1-C6-alkyl-OH, C(O)—C1-C6-alkyl, OCH2—C3-C12-cycloalkyl, C(O)H, C(O)-aryl, C(O)-heteroaryl, CO2-alkyl, CO2-aryl, CO2-heteroaryl, CONH2, CONH—C1-C6-alkyl, CONH-aryl, CONH-heteroaryl, OC(O)—C1-C6-alkyl, OC(O)-aryl, OC(O)-heteroaryl, OCO2-alkyl, OCO2-aryl, OCO2-heteroaryl, OCONH2, OCONH—C1-C6-alkyl, OCONH-aryl, OCONH-heteroaryl, NHC(O)H, NHC(O)—C1-C6-alkyl, NHC(O)-aryl, NHC(O)-heteroaryl, NHCO2-alkyl, NHCO2-aryl, NHCO2-heteroaryl, NHCONH2, NHCONH—C1-C6-alkyl, NHCONH-aryl, NHCONH-heteroaryl, SO2—C1-C6-alkyl, SO2-aryl, SO2-heteroaryl, SO2NH2, SO2NH—C1-C6 alkyl, SO2NH-aryl, S2NH-heteroaryl, C1-C6-alkyl, C3-C12-cycloalkyl, CF3, CH2CF3, CHCl2, CH2NH2, CH2SO2CH3, C1-C6 alkyl, halo alkyl, C3-C12 cycloalkyl, substituted C3-C12 cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, benzyl, benzyloxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, C1-C6-alkoxy, methoxymethoxy, methoxyethoxy, amino, benzylamino, arylamino, heteroarylamino, C1-C3-alkylamino, di-C1-C3-alkylamino, thio, aryl-thio, heteroarylthio, benzyl-thio, C1-C6-alkyl-thio, or methylthiomethyl.
The term “arylalkyl,” as used herein, refers to a C1-C3 alkyl or C1-C6 alkyl residue attached to an aryl ring. Examples include, but are not limited to, benzyl, phenethyl and the like.
The term “substituted arylalkyl,” as used herein, refers to an arylalkyl group, as previously defined, substituted by independent replacement of one, two or three of the hydrogen atoms thereon with F, Cl, Br, I, OH, NO2, CN, C1-C6-alkyl-OH, C(O)—C1-C6-alkyl, OCH2—C3-C12-cycloalkyl, C(O)H, C(O)-aryl, C(O)-heteroaryl, CO2-alkyl, CO2-aryl, CO2-heteroaryl, CONH2, CONH—C1-C6-alkyl, CONH-aryl, CONH-heteroaryl, NHC(O)H, OC(O)—C1-C6-alkyl, OC(O)-aryl, OC(O)-heteroaryl, OCO2-alkyl, OCO2-aryl, OCO2-heteroaryl, OCONH2, OCONH—C1-C6-alkyl, OCONH-aryl, OCONH-heteroaryl, NHC(O)—C1-C6-alkyl, NHC(O)-aryl, NHC(O)-heteroaryl, NHCO2-alkyl, NHCO2-aryl, NHCO2-heteroaryl, NHCONH2, NHCONH—C1-C6-alkyl, NHCONH-aryl, NHCONH-heteroaryl, SO2—C1-C6-alkyl, SO2-aryl, SO2-heteroaryl, SO2NH2, SO2NH—C1-C6-alkyl, SO2NH-aryl, SO2NH-heteroaryl, C1-C6-alkyl, C3-C12-cycloalkyl, CF3, CH2CF3, CHCl2, CH2NH2, CH2SO2CH3, C1-C6 alkyl, halo alkyl, C3-C12 cycloalkyl, substituted C3-C12 cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, benzyl, benzyloxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, C1-C6-alkoxy, methoxymethoxy, methoxyethoxy, amino, benzylamino, arylamino, heteroarylamino, C1-C3-alkylamino, di-C1-C3-alkylamino, thio, aryl-thio, heteroarylthio, benzyl-thio, C1-C6-alkyl-thio, or methylthiomethyl.
The term “heteroaryl,” as used herein, refers to a mono-, bi-, or tri-cyclic aromatic radical or ring having from five to ten ring atoms of which one ring atom is selected from S, O and N; zero, one or two ring atoms are additional heteroatoms independently selected from S, O and N; and the remaining ring atoms are carbon. Heteroaryl includes, but is not limited to, pyridinyl, pyrazinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrrolyl, pyrazolyl, imidazolyl, thiazolyl, oxazolyl, isooxazolyl, thiadiazolyl, oxadiazolyl, thiophenyl, furanyl, quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, benzimidazolyl, benzooxazolyl, quinoxalinyl, and the like.
The term “substituted heteroaryl,” as used herein, refers to a heteroaryl group as defined herein, substituted by independent replacement of one, two or three of the hydrogen atoms thereon with F, Cl, Br, I, OH, NO2, CN, C1-C6-alkyl-OH, C(O)—C1-C6-alkyl, OCH2—C3-C12-cycloalkyl, C(O)H, C(O)-aryl, C(O)-heteroaryl, CO2-alkyl, CO2-aryl, CO2-heteroaryl, CONH2, CONH—C1-C6-alkyl, CONH-aryl, CONH-heteroaryl, OC(O)—C1-C6-alkyl, OC(O)-aryl, OC(O)-heteroaryl, OCO2-alkyl, OCO2-aryl, OCO2-heteroaryl, OCONH2, OCONH—C1-C6-alkyl, OCONH-aryl, OCONH-heteroaryl, NHC(O)H, NHC(O)—C1-C6-alkyl, NHC(O)-aryl, NHC(O)-heteroaryl, NHCO2-alkyl, NHCO2-aryl, NHCO2-heteroaryl, NHCONH2, NHCONH—C1-C6-alkyl, NHCONH-aryl, NHCONH-heteroaryl, SO2—C1-C6-alkyl, SO2-aryl, SO2-heteroaryl, SO2NH2, SO2NH—C1-C6-alkyl, SO2NH-aryl, SO2NH-heteroaryl, C1-C6-alkyl, C3-12-cycloalkyl, CF3, CH2CF3, CHCl2, CH2NH2, CH2SO2CH3, C1-C6 alkyl, halo alkyl, C3-C12 cycloalkyl, substituted C3-C12 cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, benzyl, benzyloxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, C1-C6-alkoxy, methoxymethoxy, methoxyethoxy, amino, benzylamino, arylamino, heteroarylamino, C1-C3-alkylamino, di-C1-C3-alkylamino, thio, aryl-thio, heteroarylthio, benzyl-thio, C1-C6-alkyl-thio, or methylthiomethyl.
The term “C3-C12-cycloalkyl” denotes a monovalent group derived from a monocyclic or bicyclic saturated carbocyclic ring compound by the removal of a single hydrogen atom. Examples include, but not limited to, cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, bicyclo[2.2.1]heptyl, and bicyclo[2.2.2]octyl.
The term “substituted C3-C12-cycloalkyl,” as used herein, refers to a C3-C12-cycloalkyl group as defined herein, substituted by independent replacement of one, two or three of the hydrogen atoms thereon with F, Cl, Br, I, OH, NO2, CN, C1-C6-alkyl-OH, C(O)—C1-C6-alkyl, OCH2—C3-C12-cycloalkyl, C(O)H, C(O)-aryl, C(O)-heteroaryl, CO2-alkyl, CO2-aryl, CO2-heteroaryl, CONH2, CONH—C1-C6-alkyl, CONH-aryl, CONH-heteroaryl, OC(O)—C1-C6-alkyl, OC(O)-aryl, OC(O)-heteroaryl, OCO2-alkyl, OCO2-aryl, OCO2-heteroaryl, OCONH2, OCONH—C1-C6-alkyl, OCONH-aryl, OCONH-heteroaryl, NHC(O)H, NHC(O)—C1-C6-alkyl, NHC(O)-aryl, NHC(O)-heteroaryl, NHCO2-alkyl, NHCO2-aryl, NHCO2-heteroaryl, NHCONH2, NHCONH—C1-C6-alkyl, NHCONH-aryl, NHCONH-heteroaryl, SO2—C1-C6-alkyl, SO2-aryl, SO2-heteroaryl, SO2NH2, SO2NH—C1-C6-alkyl, SO2NH-aryl, SO2NH-heteroaryl, C1-C6-alkyl, C3-C12-cycloalkyl, CF3, CH2CF3, CHCl2, CH2NH2, CH2SO2CH3, C1-C6 alkyl, halo alkyl, C3-C12 cycloalkyl, substituted C3-C12 cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, benzyl, benzyloxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, C1-C6-alkoxy, methoxymethoxy, methoxyethoxy, amino, benzylamino, arylamino, heteroarylamino, C1-C3-alkylamino, di-C1-C3-alkylamino, thio, aryl-thio, heteroarylthio, benzyl-thio, C1-C6-alkyl-thio, or methylthiomethyl.
The term “heterocycloalkyl,” as used herein, refers to a non-aromatic 5-, 6- or 7-membered ring or a bi- or tri-cyclic group fused system, where (i) each ring contains between one and three heteroatoms independently selected from oxygen, sulfur and nitrogen, (ii) each 5-membered ring has 0 to 1 double bonds and each 6-membered ring has 0 to 2 double bonds, (iii) the nitrogen and sulfur heteroatoms may optionally be oxidized, (iv) the nitrogen heteroatom may optionally be quaternized, and (iv) any of the above rings may be fused to a benzene ring. Representative heterocycloalkyl groups include, but are not limited to, [1,3]dioxolane, pyrrolidinyl, pyrazolinyl, pyrazolidinyl, imidazolinyl, imidazolidinyl, piperidinyl, piperazinyl, oxazolidinyl, isoxazolidinyl, morpholinyl, thiazolidinyl, isothiazolidinyl, and tetrahydrofuryl.
The term “substituted heterocycloalkyl,” as used herein, refers to a heterocycloalkyl group, as previously defined, substituted by independent replacement or one, two, or three of the hydrogen atoms thereon with F, Cl, Br, I, OH, NO2, CN, C1-C6-alkyl-OH, C(O)—C1-C6-alkyl, OCH2—C3-C12-cycloalkyl, C(O)H, C(O)-aryl, C(O)-heteroaryl, CO2-alkyl, CO2-aryl, CO2-heteroaryl, CONH2, CONH—C1-C6-alkyl, CONH-aryl, CONH-heteroaryl, OC(O)—C1-C6-alkyl, OC(O)-aryl, OC(O)-heteroaryl, OCO2-alkyl, OCO2-aryl, OCO2-heteroaryl, OCONH2, OCONH—C1-C6-alkyl, OCONH-aryl, OCONH-heteroaryl, NHC(O)H, NHC(O)—C1-C6-alkyl, NHC(O)-aryl, NHC(O)-heteroaryl, NHCO2-alkyl, NHCO2-aryl, NHCO2-heteroaryl, NHCONH2, NHCONH—C1-C6-alkyl, NHCONH-aryl, NHCONH-heteroaryl, SO2—C1-C6-alkyl, SO2-aryl, SO2-heteroaryl, SO2NH2, SO2NH—C1-C6-alkyl, SO2NH-aryl, SO2NH-heteroaryl, C1-C6-alkyl, C3-C12-cycloalkyl, CF3, CH2CF3, CHCl2, CH2NH2, CH2SO2CH3, C1-C6 alkyl, halo alkyl, C3-C12 cycloalkyl, substituted C3-C12 cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, benzyl, benzyloxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, C1-C6-alkoxy, methoxymethoxy, methoxyethoxy, amino, benzylamino, arylamino, heteroarylamino, C1-C3-alkylamino, di-C1-C3-alkylamino, thio, aryl-thio, heteroarylthio, benzyl-thio, C1-C6-alkyl-thio, or methylthiomethyl.
The term “heteroarylalkyl,” as used herein, refers to a C1-C3 alkyl or C1-C6 alkyl residue residue attached to a heteroaryl ring. Examples include, but are not limited to, pyridinylmethyl, pyrimidinylethyl and the like.
The term “substituted heteroarylalkyl,” as used herein, refers to a heteroarylalkyl group, as previously defined, substituted by independent replacement or one, two, or three of the hydrogen atoms thereon with F, Cl, Br, I, OH, NO2, CN, C1-C6-alkyl-OH, C(O)—C1-C6-alkyl, OCH2—C3-C12-cycloalkyl, C(O)H, C(O)-aryl, C(O)-heteroaryl, CO2-alkyl, CO2-aryl, CO2-heteroaryl, CONH2, CONH—C1-C6-alkyl, CONH-aryl, CONH-heteroaryl, OC(O)—C1-C6-alkyl, OC(O)-aryl, OC(O)-heteroaryl, OCO2-alkyl, OCO2-aryl, OCO2-heteroaryl, OCONH2, OCONH—C1-C6-alkyl, OCONH-aryl, OCONH-heteroaryl, NHC(O)H, NHC(O)—C1-C6-alkyl, NHC(O)-aryl, NHC(O)-heteroaryl, NHCO2-alkyl, NHCO2-aryl, NHCO2-heteroaryl, NHCONH2, NHCONH—C1-C6-alkyl, NHCONH-aryl, NHCONH-heteroaryl, SO2—C1-C6-alkyl, SO2-aryl, SO2-heteroaryl, SO2NH2, SO2NH—C1-C6-alkyl, SO2NH-aryl, SO2NH-heteroaryl, C1-C6-alkyl, C3-C12-cycloalkyl, CF3, CH2CF3, CHCl2, CH2NH2, CH2SO2CH3, C1-C6 alkyl, halo alkyl, C3-C12 cycloalkyl, substituted C3-C12 cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, benzyl, benzyloxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, C1-C6-alkoxy, methoxymethoxy, methoxyethoxy, amino, benzylamino, arylamino, heteroarylamino, C1-C3-alkylamino, di-C1-C3-alkylamino, thio, aryl-thio, heteroarylthio, benzyl-thio, C1-C6-alkyl-thio, or methylthiomethyl.
It shall be understood that any substituted group defined above (e.g. substituted C1-C6 alkyl, substituted C1-C6 alkenyl, substituted C1-C6 alkynyl, substituted C3-C12 cycloalkyl, substituted aryl, substituted arylalkyl, substituted heteroaryl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, or substituted heterocycloalkyl) may also be substituted with the following suitable substituents: —F, —Cl, —Br, —I, —OH, protected hydroxy, aliphatic ethers, aromatic ethers, oxo, —NO2, —CN, —C1-C12-alkyl optionally substituted with halogen (such as perhaloalkyls), C2-C12-alkenyl optionally substituted with halogen, —C2-C12-alkynyl optionally substituted with halogen, —NH2, protected amino, —NH—C1-C12-alkyl, —NH—C2-C12-alkenyl, —NH—C2-C12-alkenyl, —NH—C3-C12-cycloalkyl, —NH-aryl, —NH-heteroaryl, —NH-heterocycloalkyl, -dialkylamino, -diarylamino, -diheteroarylamino, —O—C1-C12-alkyl, —O—C2-C12-alkenyl, —O—C2-C12-alkynyl, —O—C3-C12-cycloalkyl, —O-aryl, —O-heteroaryl, —O-heterocycloalkyl, —C(O)H, —C(O)—C1-C12-alkyl, —C(O)—C1-C12-alkenyl, —C(O)—C2-C12-alkynyl, —C(O)—C3-C12-cycloalkyl, —C(O)-aryl, C(O)-heteroaryl, —C(O)-heterocycloalkyl, —CONH2, —CONH—C1-C12-alkyl, —CONH—C2-C12-alkenyl, —CONH—C2-C12-alkynyl, —CONH—C3-C12-cycloalkyl, —CONH-aryl, —CONH-heteroaryl, —CONH-heterocycloalkyl, —CO2—C1-C12-alkyl, —CO2—C2-C12-alkenyl, —CO2—C2-C12-alkynyl, —CO2—C3-C12 cycloalkyl, —CO2-aryl, —CO2-heteroaryl, —CO2-heterocycloalkyl, —CO2—C1-C12-alkyl, —OCO2—C2-C12-alkenyl, —OCO2—C2-C12-alkynyl, —OCO2—C3-C12-cycloalkyl, —OCO2-aryl, —OCO2-heteroaryl, —OCO2-heterocycloalkyl, —OCONH2, —OCONH—C1-C12-alkyl, —OCONH—C2-C12-alkenyl, —OCONH—C2-C12-alkynyl, —OCONH—C3-C12-cycloalkyl, —OCONH-aryl, —OCONH-heteroaryl, —OCONH-heterocycloalkyl, —NHC(O)H, —NHC(O)—C1-C12-alkyl, —NHC(O)—C2-C12-alkenyl, —NHC(O)—C2-C12-alkynyl, —NHC(O)—C3-C12-cycloalkyl, —NHC(O)-aryl, —NHC(O)-heteroaryl, —NHC(O)-heterocycloalkyl, —NHCO2-C1-C12-alkyl, —NHCO2—C2—C12-alkenyl, —NHCO2—C2-C12-alkynyl, —NHCO2—C3-C12-cycloalkyl, —NHCO2-aryl, —NHCO2-heteroaryl, —NHCO2-heterocycloalkyl, —NHC(O)NH2, —NHC(O)NH—C1-C12-alkyl, —NHC(O)NH—C2-C12-alkenyl, —NHC(O)NH—C2-C12-alkynyl, —NHC(O)NH—C3-C12-cycloalkyl, —NHC(O)NH-aryl, —NHC(O)NH-heteroaryl, —NHC(O)NH-heterocycloalkyl, NHC(S)NH2, —NHC(S)NH—C1-C12-alkyl, —NHC(S)NH—C2-C2-alkenyl, —NHC(S)NH—C2-C12-alkynyl, —NHC(S)NH—C3-C12-cycloalkyl, —NHC(S)NH-aryl, —NHC(S)NH-heteroaryl, —NHC(S)NH-heterocycloalkyl, —NHC(NH)NH2, —NHC(NH)NH—C1-C12-alkyl, —NHC(NH)NH—C2-C12-alkenyl, —NHC(NH)NH—C2-C12-alkynyl, —NHC(NH)NH—C3-C12-cycloalkyl, —NHC(NH)NH-aryl, —NHC(NH)NH-heteroaryl, —NHC(NH)NH-heterocycloalkyl, —NHC(NH)—C1-C12-alkyl, —NHC(NH)—C2-C12-alkenyl, —NHC(NH)—C2-C12-alkynyl, —NHC(NH)—C3-C12-cycloalkyl, —NHC(NH)-aryl, —NHC(NH)-heteroaryl, —NHC(NH)-heterocycloalkyl, —(NH)NH—C1-C12-alkyl, —C(NH)NH—C2-C12-alkenyl, —(NH)NH—C2-C12-alkynyl, —C(NH)NH—C3-C12-cycloalkyl, —C(NH)NH-aryl, —C(NH)NH-heteroaryl, —C(NH)NH-heterocycloalkyl, —S(O)—C1-C12-alkyl, —S(O)—C2-C12-alkenyl, —S(O)—C2-C12-alkynyl, —S(O)—C3-C12-cycloalkyl, —S(O)-aryl, —S(O)-heteroaryl, —S(O)-heterocycloalkyl, —SO2NH2, —SO2NH—C1-C12-alkyl, —SO2NH—C2-C12-alkenyl, —SO2NH—C2-C12-alkynyl, —SO2NH—C3-C12-cycloalkyl, —SO2NH-aryl, —SO2NH-heteroaryl, —SO2NH-heterocycloalkyl, —NHSO2—C1-C12-alkyl, —NHSO2—C2-C12-alkenyl, —NHSO2—C2-C12-alkynyl, —NHSO2—C3-C12-cycloalkyl, —NHSO2-aryl, —NHSO2-heteroaryl, —NHSO2-heterocycloalkyl, —CH2NH2, —CH2SO2CH3, -aryl, -arylalkyl, -heteroaryl, -heteroarylalkyl, -heterocycloalkyl, —C3-C12-cycloalkyl, polyalkoxyalkyl, polyalkoxy, methoxymethoxy, methoxyethoxy, —SH, —S—C1-C2-alkyl, —S—C2-C12-alkenyl, —S—C2-C12-alkynyl, —S—C3-C12-cycloalkyl, —S-aryl, —S-heteroaryl, —S-heterocycloalkyl, or methylthiomethyl. It is understood that the aryls, heteroaryls, alkyls and the like can be further substituted.
The term “alkylamino” refers to a group having the structure —NH(C1-C12 alkyl) where C1-C12 alkyl is as previously defined.
The term “dialkylamino” refers to a group having the structure —N(C1-C12 alkyl)2 where C1-C12 alkyl is as previously defined. Examples of dialkylamino are, but not limited to, N,N-dimethylamino, N,N-diethylamino, N,N-methylethylamino, and the like.
The term “diarylamino” refers to a group having the structure —N(aryl)2 or —N(substituted aryl)2 where substituted aryl is as previously defined. Examples of diarylamino are, but not limited to, N,N-diphenylamino, N,N-dinaphthylamino, N,N-di(toluenyl)amino, and the like.
The term “diheteroarylamino” refers to a group having the structure —N(heteroaryl)2 or —N(substituted heteroaryl)2, where heteroaryl and substituted heteroaryl is as previously defined. Examples of diheteroarylamino are, but not limited to, N,N-difuranylamino, N,N-dithiazolidinylamino, N,N-di(imidazole)amino, and the like.
The compounds described herein contain one or more asymmetric centers and thus give rise to enantiomers, diastereomers, and other stereoisomeric forms that may be defined, in terms of absolute stereochemistry, as (R)- or (S)-, or as (D)- or (L)-for amino acids. The present invention is meant to include all such possible isomers, as well as their racemic and optically pure forms. Optical isomers may be prepared from their respective optically active precursors by the procedures described above, or by resolving the racemic mixtures. The resolution can be carried out in the presence of a resolving agent, by chromatography or by repeated crystallization or by some combination of these techniques which are known to those skilled in the art. Further details regarding resolutions can be found in Jacques, et al., Enantiomers, Racemates, and Resolutions (John Wiley & Sons, 1981). When the compounds described herein contain olefinic double bonds or other centers of geometric asymmetry, and unless specified otherwise, it is intended that the compounds include both E and Z geometric isomers. Likewise, all tautomeric forms are also intended to be included. The configuration of any carbon-carbon double bond appearing herein is selected for convenience only and is not intended to designate a particular configuration unless the text so states; thus a carbon-carbon double bond depicted arbitrarily herein as trans may be cis, trans, or a mixture of the two in any proportion.
The term “subject” as used herein refers to a mammal. A subject therefore refers to, for example, dogs, cats, horses, cows, pigs, guinea pigs, and the like. Preferably the subject is a human. When the subject is a human, the subject may be referred to herein as a patient.
As used herein, the term “pharmaceutically acceptable salt” refers to those salts of the compounds formed by the process of the present invention which are, within the scope of sound medical judgment, suitable for use in contact with the tissues of humans and lower animals without undue toxicity, irritation, allergic response and the like, and are commensurate with a reasonable benefit/risk ratio. Pharmaceutically acceptable salts are well known in the art. For example, S. M. Berge, et al. describes pharmaceutically acceptable salts in detail in J. Pharmaceutical Sciences, 66: 1-19 (1977). The salts can be prepared in situ during the final isolation and purification of the compounds of the invention, or separately by reacting the free base function with a suitable organic acid. Examples of pharmaceutically acceptable include, but are not limited to, nontoxic acid addition salts are salts of an amino group formed with inorganic acids such as hydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, phosphoric acid, sulfuric acid and perchloric acid or with organic acids such as acetic acid, maleic acid, tartaric acid, citric acid, succinic acid or malonic acid or by using other methods used in the art such as ion exchange. Other pharmaceutically acceptable salts include, but are not limited to, adipate, alginate, ascorbate, aspartate, benzenesulfonate, benzoate, bisulfate, borate, butyrate, camphorate, camphorsulfonate, citrate, cyclopentanepropionate, digluconate, dodecylsulfate, ethanesulfonate, formate, fumarate, glucoheptonate, glycerophosphate, gluconate, hemisulfate, heptanoate, hexanoate, hydroiodide, 2-hydroxy-ethanesulfonate, lactobionate, lactate, laurate, lauryl sulfate, malate, maleate, malonate, methanesulfonate, 2-naphthalenesulfonate, nicotinate, nitrate, oleate, oxalate, palmitate, pamoate, pectinate, persulfate, 3-phenylpropionate, phosphate, picrate, pivalate, propionate, stearate, succinate, sulfate, tartrate, thiocyanate, p-toluenesulfonate, undecanoate, valerate salts, and the like. Representative alkali or alkaline earth metal salts include sodium, lithium, potassium, calcium, magnesium, and the like. Further pharmaceutically acceptable salts include, when appropriate, nontoxic ammonium, quaternary ammonium, and amine cations formed using counterions such as halide, hydroxide, carboxylate, sulfate, phosphate, nitrate, alkyl having from 1 to 6 carbon atoms, sulfonate and aryl sulfonate.
As used herein, the term “pharmaceutically acceptable ester” refers to esters of the compounds formed by the process of the present invention which hydrolyze in vivo and include those that break down readily in the human body to leave the parent compound or a salt thereof. Suitable ester groups include, for example, those derived from pharmaceutically acceptable aliphatic carboxylic acids, particularly alkanoic, alkenoic, cycloalkanoic and alkanedioic acids, in which each alkyl or alkenyl moiety advantageously has not more than 6 carbon atoms. Examples of particular esters include, but are not limited to, formates, acetates, propionates, butyrates, acrylates and ethylsuccinates.
The term “pharmaceutically acceptable prodrugs” as used herein refers to those prodrugs of the compounds formed by the process of the present invention which are, within the scope of sound medical judgment, suitable for use in contact with the tissues of humans and lower animals with undue toxicity, irritation, allergic response, and the like, commensurate with a reasonable benefit/risk ratio, and effective for their intended use, as well as the zwitterionic forms, where possible, of the compounds of the present invention. “Prodrug”, as used herein means a compound which is convertible in vivo by metabolic means (e.g. by hydrolysis) to afford any compound delineated by the formulae of the instant invention. Various forms of prodrugs are known in the art, for example, as discussed in Bundgaard, (ed.), Design of Prodrugs, Elsevier (1985); Widder, et al. (ed.), Methods in Enzymology, vol. 4, Academic Press (1985); Krogsgaard-Larsen, et al., (ed). “Design and Application of Prodrugs, Textbook of Drug Design and Development, Chapter 5, 113-191 (1991); Bundgaard, et al., Journal of Drug Deliver Reviews, 8:1-38(1992); Bundgaard, J. of Pharmaceutical Sciences, 77:285 et seq. (1988); Higuchi and Stella (eds.) Prodrugs as Novel Drug Delivery Systems, American Chemical Society (1975); and Bernard Testa & Joachim Mayer, “Hydrolysis In Drug And Prodrug Metabolism: Chemistry, Biochemistry And Enzymology,” John Wiley and Sons, Ltd. (2002).
Combinations of substituents and variables envisioned by this invention are only those that result in the formation of stable compounds. The term “stable”, as used herein, refers to compounds which possess stability sufficient to allow manufacture and which maintains the integrity of the compound for a sufficient period of time to be useful for the purposes detailed herein (e.g., therapeutic or prophylactic administration to a subject).
The synthesized compounds can be separated from a reaction mixture and further purified by a method such as column chromatography, high pressure liquid chromatography, or recrystallization. As can be appreciated by the skilled artisan, further methods of synthesizing the compounds of the formulae herein will be evident to those of ordinary skill in the art. Additionally, the various synthetic steps may be performed in an alternate sequence or order to give the desired compounds. In addition, the solvents, temperatures, reaction durations, etc. delineated herein are for purposes of illustration only and one of ordinary skill in the art will recognize that variation of the reaction conditions can produce the desired bridged macrocyclic products of the present invention. Synthetic chemistry transformations and protecting group methodologies (protection and deprotection) useful in synthesizing the compounds described herein are known in the art and include, for example, those such as described in R. Larock, Comprehensive Organic Transformations, VCH Publishers (1989); T. W. Greene and P. G. M. Wuts, Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, 2d. Ed., John Wiley and Sons (1991); L. Fieser and M. Fieser, Fieser and Fieser's Reagents for Organic Synthesis, John Wiley and Sons (1994); and L. Paquette, ed., Encyclopedia of Reagents for Organic Synthesis, John Wiley and Sons (1995).
The compounds of this invention may be modified by appending various functionalities via any synthetic means delineated herein to enhance selective biological properties. Such modifications are known in the art and include those which increase biological penetration into a given biological system (e.g., blood, lymphatic system, central nervous system), increase oral availability, increase solubility to allow administration by injection, alter metabolism and alter rate of excretion.
Pharmaceutical Compositions
The pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention comprise a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of the present invention formulated together with one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers. As used herein, the term “pharmaceutically acceptable carrier” means a non-toxic, inert solid, semi-solid or liquid filler, diluent, encapsulating material or formulation auxiliary of any type. Some examples of materials which can serve as pharmaceutically acceptable carriers are sugars such as lactose, glucose and sucrose; starches such as corn starch and potato starch; cellulose and its derivatives such as sodium carboxymethyl cellulose, ethyl cellulose and cellulose acetate; powdered tragacanth; malt; gelatin; talc; excipients such as cocoa butter and suppository waxes; oils such as peanut oil, cottonseed oil; safflower oil; sesame oil; olive oil; corn oil and soybean oil; glycols; such a propylene glycol; esters such as ethyl oleate and ethyl laurate; agar; buffering agents such as magnesium hydroxide and aluminum hydroxide; alginic acid; pyrogen-free water; isotonic saline; Ringer's solution; ethyl alcohol, and phosphate buffer solutions, as well as other non-toxic compatible lubricants such as sodium lauryl sulfate and magnesium stearate, as well as coloring agents, releasing agents, coating agents, sweetening, flavoring and perfuming agents, preservatives and antioxidants can also be present in the composition, according to the judgment of the formulator. The pharmaceutical compositions of this invention can be administered to humans and other animals orally, rectally, parenterally, intracisternally, intravaginally, intraperitoneally, topically (as by powders, ointments, or drops), buccally, or as an oral or nasal spray.
Liquid dosage forms for oral administration include pharmaceutically acceptable emulsions, microemulsions, solutions, suspensions, syrups and elixirs. In addition to the active compounds, the liquid dosage forms may contain inert diluents commonly used in the art such as, for example, water or other solvents, solubilizing agents and emulsifiers such as ethyl alcohol, isopropyl alcohol, ethyl carbonate, ethyl acetate, benzyl alcohol, benzyl benzoate, propylene glycol, 1,3-butylene glycol, dimethylformamide, oils (in particular, cottonseed, groundnut, corn, germ, olive, castor, and sesame oils), glycerol, tetrahydrofurfuryl alcohol, polyethylene glycols and fatty acid esters of sorbitan, and mixtures thereof. Besides inert diluents, the oral compositions can also include adjuvants such as wetting agents, emulsifying and suspending agents, sweetening, flavoring, and perfuming agents.
Injectable preparations, for example, sterile injectable aqueous or oleaginous suspensions may be formulated according to the known art using suitable dispersing or wetting agents and suspending agents. The sterile injectable preparation may also be a sterile injectable solution, suspension or emulsion in a nontoxic parenterally acceptable diluent or solvent, for example, as a solution in 1,3-butanediol. Among the acceptable vehicles and solvents that may be employed are water, Ringer's solution, U.S.P. and isotonic sodium chloride solution. In addition, sterile, fixed oils are conventionally employed as a solvent or suspending medium. For this purpose any bland fixed oil can be employed including synthetic mono- or diglycerides. In addition, fatty acids such as oleic acid are used in the preparation of injectables.
The injectable formulations can be sterilized, for example, by filtration through a bacterial-retaining filter, or by incorporating sterilizing agents in the form of sterile solid compositions which can be dissolved or dispersed in sterile water or other sterile injectable medium prior to use.
In order to prolong the effect of a drug, it is often desirable to slow the absorption of the drug from subcutaneous or intramuscular injection. This may be accomplished by the use of a liquid suspension of crystalline or amorphous material with poor water solubility. The rate of absorption of the drug then depends upon its rate of dissolution which, in turn, may depend upon crystal size and crystalline form. Alternatively, delayed absorption of a parenterally administered drug form is accomplished by dissolving or suspending the drug in an oil vehicle. Injectable depot forms are made by forming microencapsule matrices of the drug in biodegradable polymers such as polylactide-polyglycolide. Depending upon the ratio of drug to polymer and the nature of the particular polymer employed, the rate of drug release can be controlled. Examples of other biodegradable polymers include poly(orthoesters) and poly(anhydrides). Depot injectable formulations are also prepared by entrapping the drug in liposomes or microemulsions which are compatible with body tissues.
Compositions for rectal or vaginal administration are preferably suppositories which can be prepared by mixing the compounds of this invention with suitable non-irritating excipients or carriers such as cocoa butter, polyethylene glycol or a suppository wax which are solid at ambient temperature but liquid at body temperature and therefore melt in the rectum or vaginal cavity and release the active compound.
Solid compositions of a similar type may also be employed as fillers in soft and hard-filled gelatin capsules using such excipients as lactose or milk sugar as well as high molecular weight polyethylene glycols and the like.
The active compounds can also be in micro-encapsulated form with one or more excipients as noted above. The solid dosage forms of tablets, dragees, capsules, pills, and granules can be prepared with coatings and shells such as enteric coatings, release controlling coatings and other coatings well known in the pharmaceutical formulating art. In such solid dosage forms the active compound may be admixed with at least one inert diluent such as sucrose, lactose or starch. Such dosage forms may also comprise, as is normal practice, additional substances other than inert diluents, e.g., tableting lubricants and other tableting aids such a magnesium stearate and microcrystalline cellulose. In the case of capsules, tablets and pills, the dosage forms may also comprise buffering agents. They may optionally contain opacifying agents and can also be of a composition that they release the active ingredient(s) only, or preferentially, in a certain part of the intestinal tract, optionally, in a delayed manner. Examples of embedding compositions which can be used include polymeric substances and waxes.
Dosage forms for topical or transdermal administration of a compound of this invention include ointments, pastes, creams, lotions, gels, powders, solutions, sprays, inhalants or patches. The active component is admixed under sterile conditions with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and any needed preservatives or buffers as may be required. Ophthalmic formulation, ear drops, eye ointments, powders and solutions are also contemplated as being within the scope of this invention.
The ointments, pastes, creams and gels may contain, in addition to an active compound of this invention, excipients such as animal and vegetable fats, oils, waxes, paraffins, starch, tragacanth, cellulose derivatives, polyethylene glycols, silicones, bentonites, silicic acid, talc and zinc oxide, or mixtures thereof.
Powders and sprays can contain, in addition to the compounds of this invention, excipients such as lactose, talc, silicic acid, aluminum hydroxide, calcium silicates and polyamide powder, or mixtures of these substances. Sprays can additionally contain customary propellants such as chlorofluorohydrocarbons.
Transdermal patches have the added advantage of providing controlled delivery of a compound to the body. Such dosage forms can be made by dissolving or dispensing the compound in the proper medium. Absorption enhancers can also be used to increase the flux of the compound across the skin. The rate can be controlled by either providing a rate controlling membrane or by dispersing the compound in a polymer matrix or gel.
Antiviral Activity
An inhibitory amount or dose of the compounds of the present invention may range from about 0.1 mg/Kg to about 500 mg/Kg, alternatively from about 1 to about 50 mg/Kg. Inhibitory amounts or doses will also vary depending on route of administration, as well as the possibility of co-usage with other agents.
According to the methods of treatment of the present invention, viral infections are treated or prevented in a subject such as a human or lower mammal by administering to the subject an anti-hepatitis C virally effective amount or an inhibitory amount of a compound of the present invention, in such amounts and for such time as is necessary to achieve the desired result. An additional method of the present invention is the treatment of biological samples with an inhibitory amount of a compound of composition of the present invention in such amounts and for such time as is necessary to achieve the desired result.
The term “anti-hepatitis C virally effective amount” of a compound of the invention, as used herein, mean a sufficient amount of the compound so as to decrease the viral load in a biological sample or in a subject. As well understood in the medical arts, an anti-hepatitis C virally effective amount of a compound of this invention will be at a reasonable benefit/risk ratio applicable to any medical treatment.
The term “inhibitory amount” of a compound of the present invention means a sufficient amount to decrease the hepatitis C viral load in a biological sample or a subject. It is understood that when said inhibitory amount of a compound of the present invention is administered to a subject it will be at a reasonable benefit/risk ratio applicable to any medical treatment as determined by a physician. The term “biological sample(s),” as used herein, means a substance of biological origin intended for administration to a subject. Examples of biological samples include, but are not limited to, blood and components thereof such as plasma, platelets, subpopulations of blood cells and the like; organs such as kidney, liver, heart, lung, and the like; sperm and ova; bone marrow and components thereof, or stem cells. Thus, another embodiment of the present invention is a method of treating a biological sample by contacting said biological sample with an inhibitory amount of a compound or pharmaceutical composition of the present invention.
Upon improvement of a subject's condition, a maintenance dose of a compound, composition or combination of this invention may be administered, if necessary. Subsequently, the dosage or frequency of administration, or both, may be reduced, as a function of the symptoms, to a level at which the improved condition is retained when the symptoms have been alleviated to the desired level, treatment should cease. The subject may, however, require intermittent treatment on a long-term basis upon any recurrence of disease symptoms.
It will be understood, however, that the total daily usage of the compounds and compositions of the present invention will be decided by the attending physician within the scope of sound medical judgment. The specific inhibitory dose for any particular patient will depend upon a variety of factors including the disorder being treated and the severity of the disorder; the activity of the specific compound employed; the specific composition employed; the age, body weight, general health, sex and diet of the patient; the time of administration, route of administration, and rate of excretion of the specific compound employed; the duration of the treatment; drugs used in combination or coincidental with the specific compound employed; and like factors well known in the medical arts.
The total daily inhibitory dose of the compounds of this invention administered to a subject in single or in divided doses can be in amounts, for example, from 0.01 to 50 mg/kg body weight or more usually from 0.1 to 25 mg/kg body weight. Single dose compositions may contain such amounts or submultiples thereof to make up the daily dose. In general, treatment regimens according to the present invention comprise administration to a patient in need of such treatment from about 10 mg to about 1000 mg of the compound(s) of this invention per day in single or multiple doses.
Unless otherwise defined, all technical and scientific terms used herein are accorded the meaning commonly known to one with ordinary skill in the art. All publications, patents, published patent applications, and other references mentioned herein are hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety.
Abbreviations
Abbreviations which have been used in the descriptions of the schemes and the examples that follow are:
    • ACN for acetonitrile;
    • BME for 2-mercaptoethanol;
    • BOP for benzotriazol-1-yloxy-tris(dimethylamino)phosphonium hexafluorophosphate;
    • COD for cyclooctadiene;
    • DAST for diethylaminosulfur trifluoride;
    • DABCYL for 6-(N-4′-carboxy-4-(dimethylamino) azobenzene)-aminohexyl-1-O-(2-cyanoethyl)-(N,N-diisopropyl)-phosphoramidite;
    • DCM for dichloromethane;
    • DIAD for diisopropyl azodicarboxylate;
    • DIBAL-H for diisobutylaluminum hydride;
    • DIEA for diisopropyl ethylamine;
    • DMAP for N,N-dimethylaminopyridine;
    • DME for ethylene glycol dimethyl ether;
    • DMEM for Dulbecco's Modified Eagles Media;
    • DMF for N,N-dimethyl formamide;
    • DMSO for dimethylsulfoxide;
    • DUPHOS for
      Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00149
    • EDANS for 5-(2-Amino-ethylamino)-naphthalene-1-sulfonic acid;
    • EDCl or EDC for 1-(3-diethylaminopropyl)-3-ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride;
    • EtOAc for ethyl acetate;
    • HATU for O(7-Azabenzotriazole-1-yl)-N,N,N′,N′-tetramethyluronium hexafluorophosphate;
    • Hoveyda's Cat. for Dichloro(o-isopropoxyphenylmethylene) (tricyclohexylphosphine)ruthenium(II);
    • KHMDS is potassium bis(trimethylsilyl) amide;
    • Ms for mesyl;
    • NMM for N-4-methylmorpholine
    • PyBrOP for Bromo-tri-pyrolidino-phosphonium hexafluorophosphate;
    • Ph for phenyl;
    • RCM for ring-closing metathesis;
    • RT for reverse transcription;
    • RT-PCR for reverse transcription-polymerase chain reaction;
    • TEA for triethyl amine;
    • TEA for trifluoroacetic acid;
    • THF for tetrahydrofuran;
    • TLC for thin layer chromatography;
    • TPP or PPh3 for triphenylphosphine;
    • tBOC or Boc for tert-butyloxy carbonyl; and
    • Xantphos for 4,5-Bis-diphenylphosphanyl-9,9-dimethyl-9H-xanthene.
Synthetic Methods
The compounds and processes of the present invention will be better understood in connection with the following synthetic schemes which illustrate the methods by which the compounds of the invention may be prepared.
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00150
All of the quinoxaline analogs were prepared from the common intermediate 1f. The synthesis of compound (1-6) is outlined in Scheme 1. Commercially available boc-hydroxyproline (1-1) is treated with HCl in dioxane and is further coupled with acid (1-2) using HATU to afford intermediate (1-3). Other amino acid derivatives containing a terminal alkene may be used in place of (1-2) in order to create varied macrocyclic structures (for further details see WO/0059929). Hydrolysis of (1-3) with LiOH followed by another peptide coupling with cyclopropyl amine (1-4) yielded the tri-peptide (1-5). Finally, ring closure methathesis with a Ruthenium-based catalyst gave the desired key intermediate (1-6) (for further details on ring closing metathesis see recent reviews: Grubbs et al., Acc. Chem. Res., 1995, 28, 446; Shrock et al., Tetrahedron 1999, 55, 8141; Furstner, A. Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. 2000, 39, 3012; Tmka et al., Acc. Chem. Res. 2001, 34, 18; and Hoveyda et al., Chem. Eur. J. 2001, 7, 945).
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00151
The quinoxaline analogs of the present invention were prepared via several different synthetic routes. The simplest method, shown in Scheme 2, is to condense commercially available 1H-quinoxalin-2-one analogs including, but not limited to, compounds 2-1-2-5 with key intermediate 1-6 by using Mitsunobu conditions followed by hydrolysis with LiOH. The existing literature predicts Mistonobu product formation at the 1 position nitrogen, however attachment at the carbonyl oxygen was observed to form compound 2-2. A detailed discussion of the identification and characterization of the unexpected oxo Mitosunobu addition product appears in the examples herein. For further details on the Mitsunobu reaction, see O. Mitsunobu, Synthesis 1981, 1-28; D. L. Hughes, Org. React. 29, 1-162 (1983); D. L. Hughes, Organic Preparations and Procedures Int. 28, 127-164 (1996); and J. A. Dodge, S. A. Jones, Recent Res. Dev. Org. Chem. 1, 273-283 (1997).
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00152
Various quinoxaline derivatives of formula (3-3) can be made with phenyl diamines of formula (3-1), wherein R4 is previously defined, and keto acids or esters of formula (3-2), wherein R4 is previously defined, in anhydrous methanol at room temperature (see Bekerman et al., J. Heterocycl. Chem. 1992, 29, 129-133 for further details of this reaction). Examples of phenyl diamines suitable for creating quinoxaline derivatives of formula (3-3) include, but are not limited to, 1,2-diamino-4-nitrobenze, o-phenylenediamine, 3,4-diaminotoluene, 4-chloro-1,2-phenylenediamine, methyl-3,4-diaminobenzoate, benzo[1,3]dioxole-5,6-diamine, 1,2-diamino-4,5-methylene dioxybenzene, 4-chloro-5-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzenediamine, and the like. Examples of keto acids suitable for the reaction described in Scheme 3 include, but are not limited to, benzoylformic acid, phenylpyruvic acid, indole-3-glyoxylic acid, indole-3-pyruvic acid, nitrophenylpyruvic acid, (2-furyl)glyoxylic acid, and the like. Examples of keto esters suitable for the reaction described in Scheme 3 include, but are not limited to ethyl thiophene-2-glyoxylate, ethyl 2-oxo-4-phenylbutyrate, ethyl 2-(formylamino)-4-thiazolyl glyoxylate, ethyl-2-amino-4-thiozolyl glyoxylate, ethyl-2-oxo-4-phenylbutyrate, ethyl-(5-bromothien-2-yl)glyoxylate, ethyl-3-indolylglyoxylate, ethyl-2-methylbenzoyl formate, ethyl-3-ethylbenzoyl formate, ethyl-3-ethylbenzoyl formate, ethyl-4-cyano-2-oxobutyrate, methyl(1-methylindolyl)-3-glyoxylate, and the like.
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00153
3,6 substituted quinoxalin-2-ones of formula (4-4), wherein R4 is previously defined, can be made in a regioselective manner to favor the 6-positon substitution beginning with the amide coupling of 4-methoxy-2-nitro aniline (4-1) and substituted gloxylic acid (4-2) to yield compound (4-3). The 3,6-substituted quinoxalin-2-one (4-4) is created via catalytic reduction of the nitro of compound (4-3) followed by condensation to the 3,6-substituted quinoxalin-2-one (4-4). Other substituents may be introduced into (4-4) through the use of other 2-nitroanilines. Examples of keto acids suitable for the reaction described in Scheme 4 include, but are not limited to, benzoylformic acid, phenylpyruvic acid, indole-3-glyoxylic acid, indole-3-pyruvic acid, nitrophenylpyruvic acid, (2-furyl)glyoxylic acid, and the like. Examples of 2-nitro anilines suitable for the reaction described in Scheme 4 include, but are not limited to, 4-ethoxy-2-nitroaniline, 4-amino-3-nitrobenzotrifluoride, 4,5-dimethyl-2-nitroaniline, 4-fluoro-2-nitroaniline, 4-chloro-2-nitroaniline, 4-amino-3-nitromethylbenzoate, 4-benzoyl-2-nitroaniline, 3-bromo-4-methoxy-2-nitroaniline, 3′-amino-4′-methyl-2-nitroacetophenone, 5-ethoxy-4-fluoro-2-nitroaniline, 4-bromo-2-nitroaniline, 4-(trifluoromethoxy)-2-nitroaniline, ethyl-4-amino3-nitrobenzoate, 4-bromo-2-methyl-6-nitroaniline, 4-propoxy-2-nitroaniline, 5-(propylthio)-2-nitroaniline, and the like.
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00154
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00155
  • A. A key intermediate, 3-chloro-1H-quinoxalin-2-one (5-3), can be synthesized from phenyl diamines of formula (3-1), as previously defined, and oxalic acid diethyl ester (5-1) to yield 1,4-dihydro-quinoxaline-2,3-dione (5-2) under similar conditions as discussed in Scheme 3 (see Bekerman et al., J. Heterocycl. Chem. 1992, 29, 129-133) followed by treatment with SOCl2 (1.37 equiv.) in (1:40 DMF:toluene) (see Loev et al, J. Med Chem. (1985), 28, 363-366 for further details).
  • B. The key 3-chloro-quinoxalin-2-one (5-3) is added to the macrocyclic precursor (1-6) via Mitsunobu conditions, adding via the carbonyl oxygen, rather than the expected 1-position nitrogen, to give the key macrocylic intermediate of formula (5-4). This intermediate facilitates the introduction of various substituents at the 3-position of the quinoxaline.
    Suzuki Coupling
Compounds of formula (5-5), wherein R4 is previously defined, can be synthesized via Suzuki coupling reaction with an aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, or substituted heteroaryl boronic acid in DME in the presence of Pd(PPh3)4, and CsCO3. For further details concerning the Suzuki coupling reaction see A. Suzuki, Pure Appl. Chem. 63, 419-422 (1991) and A. R. Martin, Y. Yang, Acta Chem. Scand. 47, 221-230 (1993). Examples of boronic acids suitable for Suzuki coupling to macrocyclic key intermediate (5-5) include, but are not limited to, 2-bromo thiophene, phenylboronic acid, 5-bromothiophene-3-boronic acid, 4-cyanophenylboronic acid, 4-trifluormethoxyphenylboronic acid, and the like.
Sonogashira Reaction
Compounds of formula (5-6), wherein R1 is as previously defined, can be synthesized via Sonagashira reaction with the macrocyclic key intermediate a terminal alkyne in acetonitrile in the presence triethylamine, PdCl2(PPh3)2, and CuI at 90° C. for 12 hours. For further details of the Sonogashira reaction see Sonogashira, Comprehensive Organic Synthesis, Volume 3, Chapters 2,4 and Sonogashira, Synthesis 1977, 777. Terminal alkenes suitable for the Sonogashira reaction with macrocyclic key intermediate (5-5) include, but are not limited to, ethynylbenzene, 4-cyano-ethynylbenzene, propargylbenzene, and the like.
Stille Coupling
Compounds of formula (5-7), wherein R4 is previously defined, can be synthesized via Stille coupling reaction with key macrocyclic intermediate of formula (5-4) and aryl stannanes in dioxane in the presence of Pd(PPh3)4. For further details of the Stille Coupling reaction see J. K. Stille, Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. 25, 508-524 (1986), M. Pereyre et al., Tin in Organic Synthesis (Butterworths, Boston, 1987) pp 185-207 passim, and a review of synthetic applications in T. N. Mitchell, Synthesis 1992, 803-815. Organostannanes suitable for Stille coupling with key macrocyclic intermediate (5-4) include, but are not limited to, tributyltin cyanide, allyl-tri-n-butyltin, 2-tributyltin-pyridine, 2-tri-n-butyltin furan, 2-tri-n-butyltin thiophene, 2,3-dihydron-5-(tri-n-butyltin)benzofuran, and the like.
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00156
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00157
Via the key macrocyclic 3-chloro-quinoxalinyl intermediate (5-4), three additional classes of substituents may be introduced at the 3 position of the quinoxaline ring. Among the various groups that may be introduced are mono-substituted amino, di-substituted amino, ethers, and thio-ethers.
The amino-substituted quinoxaline (6-1), wherein R1 and R4 are as previously defined, can be formed through adding to a 0.1M solution of macrocyclic quinoxalinyl intermediate (5-4) in 10 ml DMF, K2CO3 (2 equiv.) and HNR1R4 (1.2 equiv.), and stirring the resulting reaction mixture at room temperature for 5-12 hours. Amines suitable for these conditions include, but are not limited to, ethyl amine, 2-phenyl ethyl amine, cyclohexylamine, ethylmethylamine, diisopropyl amine, benzylethyl amine, 4-pentenyl amine, propargyl amine and the like.
For amines wherein R1 is hydrogen and R4 is aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, or substituted heteroaryl, a different set of conditions must be used to arrive on compound (6-1). Adding of NaH (2 equiv.) and HNR5R6 (1.2 equiv.) to a 0.1M solution of the macrocyclic quinoxalinyl intermediate (5-4) in THF and stirring the resulting reaction mixture for 5-12 hours affords the aniline substituted compound (6-1). Amines suitable for the instant conditions are aniline, 4-methoxy aniline, 2-amino-pyridine, and the like.
Introduction of ethers to the 2 position of the quinoxaline ring, can be achieved through treating a 0.1M solution of macrocyclic quinoxalinyl intermediate (5-4) in DMF with K2CO3 (2 equiv.) and HOR4 (1.2 equiv.), wherein R4 is previously defined. The resulting reaction mixture can then be stirred for 5-12 hours at room temperature to arrive at the desired ether moiety at the 3 postion. Alcohols suitable for these conditions include, but are not limited to, ethanol, propanol, isobutanol, trifluoromethanol, phenol, 4-methoxyphenol, pyridin-3-ol, and the like. Thioesters can be made via the same procedure.
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00158
Derivation of the benzo portion of the quinoxaline ring may be achieved through the halogen-substituted quinoxaline of formula (7-2). Quinoxaline of formula (7-2) can be formed with chloro-substituted phenyldiamine (7-1) with diketo compound of formula (7-2), wherein W, Z, and R3 are as previously defined, in anhydrous methanol as previously detailed. Intermediate (7-3) is formed under Mitsunobu conditions with macrocyclic precursor (7-6) and chlorosubstituted quinoxaline (7-2). Intermediate (7-3) may then undergo Suzuki coupling reactions, Sonogashira reactions, or Stille couplings at the position occupied by the chloro. See previous discussion of Suzuki couplings, Sonogashira reactions, and Stille couplings for further details. The Buchwald reaction allows for the substitution with amines, both primary and secondary, as well as 1H-nitrogen heterocycles at the aryl bromide. For further details of the Buchwald reaction see J. F. Hartwig, Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. 37, 2046-2067 (1998).
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00159
The 3-substituted 2-Oxo-1,2-dihydro-quinoxaline-6-carboxylic acid intermediate (8-4) can be formed via condensation of ethyl 3,4-diaminobenzoate (8-1) and oxo acetic acid of formula (8-2), wherein R4 is previously defined, via the method described previously in Scheme 3 (see Bekerman et al., J. Heterocycl. Chem. 1992, 29, 129-133 for further details). The resulting ethyl ester (8- 3 ) is then hydrolyzed with LiOH in MeOH at room temperature to yield carboxylic acid intermediate (8-4).
Carboxylic acid (8-4) then may be converted to substituted ketone (8-6) via Weinreb's amide (8-5) and subsequent treatment with various Grignard Reagents (see Weinreb et al. Tetrahedron Lett. 1977, 4171; Weinreb et al, Synth. Commun. 1982, 12, 989 for details of the formation and use of Weinreb's amide; and see B. S. Furniss, A. J. Hannaford, P. W. G. Smith, A. R. Tatchell, Vogel's Textbook of Practical Organic Chemistry, 5th ed., Longman, 1989). The addition is performed in an inert solvent, generally at low temperatures. Suitable solvents include, but are not limited to, tetrahydrofuran, diethylether, 1,4-dioxane, 1,2-dimethoxyethane, and hexanes. Preferably the solvent is tetrahydrofuran or diethylether. Preferably the reaction is run at −78° C. to 0° C.
In the alternative, carboxylic acid (8-4) may be used to form various amides of formula (8-7), wherein R1 and R4 are previously defined, in a manner generally described in Scheme 8. All of the various quinoxalin-2-one compounds described in Scheme 8 are further coupled to the macrocyclic precursor via the Mitsunobu conditions described above
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00160
Further 6-substituted quinoxalin-2-one compounds can be made via the procedures set forth generally in Scheme 9.
A. Reduction of 6-nitro and Amide Formation
6-nitro-1H-quinoxalin-2-one (9-3) can be formed in the manner previously described from the 3,4-diaminonitrobenzene and the oxo acetic acid of formula (9-2), wherein R4 is previously described. Reduction of the-nitro group at the 6-position can be achieved via Pd/C with H2NNH2.H2O in refluxing MeOH. The 6-position amine (9-4) then can be treated with a wide array of acid chlorides to arrive upon various amides of formula (9-5).
B. Oxidation of Benzyl Alcohol and Reductive Amination
Quinoxalin-2-one of formula (9-7) can be formed via the condensation of 3,4-diaminobenzyl alcohol and various oxo acetic acids of formula (9-2), wherein R4 is as previously defined as elucidated in previous schemes. The resulting benzyl alcohol (9-7) may then be oxidized under Swern conditions, or any other oxidation conditionsto arrive on aldehyde of formula (9-8). For further details concerning the Swern reaction see A. J. Mancuso, D. Swern, Synthesis 1981, 165-185 passim; T. T. Tidwell, Org. React. 39, 297-572 passim (1990). For other oxidation conditions see B. S. Furniss, A. J. Hannaford, P. W. G Smith, A. R. Tatchell, Vogel's Textbook of Practical Organic Chemistry, 5th ed., Longman, 1989. Subsequent reductive amination with primary or secondary amines in the presence of NaCNBH3 and acetic acid can yield compounds of formula (9-9).
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00161
Reduction of the preceding quinoxalinyl macrocyclic compounds is performed by treating a solution of the ethyl ester (7-4) in THF/MeOH/H2O with LiOH.H2O to afford the corresponding free acid.
All references cited herein, whether in print, electronic, computer readable storage media or other form, are expressly incorporated by reference in their entirety, including but not limited to, abstracts, articles, journals, publications, texts, treatises, internet web sites, databases, patents, and patent publications.
EXAMPLES
The compounds and processes of the present invention will be better understood in connection with the following examples, which are intended as an illustration only and not to limit the scope of the invention. Various changes and modifications to the disclosed embodiments will be apparent to those skilled in the art and such changes and modifications including, without limitation, those relating to the chemical structures, substituents, derivatives, formulations and/or methods of the invention may be made without departing from the spirit of the invention and the scope of the appended claims
Example 1
Synthesis of the cyclic peptide precursor
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00162
1A. To a solution of Boc-L-2-amino-8-nonenoic acid 1a (1.36 g, 5 mol) and the commercially available cis-L-hydroxyproline methyl ester 1b (1.09 g, 6 mmol) in 15 ml DMF, DIEA (4 ml, 4 eq.) and HATU (4 g, 2 eq) were added. The coupling is carried out at 0° C. over a period of 1 hour. The reaction mixture is diluted with 100 mL EtOAc, and followed by washing with 5% citric acid 2×20 ml, water 2×20 ml, 1M NaHCO3 4×20 ml and brine 2×10 ml, respectively. The organic phase is dried over anhydrous Na2SO4 and then is evaporated, affording the dipeptide 1c (1.91 g, 95.8%) that is identified by HPLC (Retention time=8.9 min, 30-70%, 90% B), and MS (found 421.37, M+Na+).
1B. The dipeptide 1c (1.91 g) is dissolved in 15 mL of dioxane and 15 mL of 1 N LiOH aqueous solution and the hydrolysis reaction is carried out at room temperature for 4 hours. The reaction mixture is acidified by 5% citric acid and extracted with 100 mL EtOAc, and followed by washing with water 2×20 ml, 1M NaHCO3 2×20 ml and brine 2×20 ml, respectively. The organic phase is dried over anhydrous Na2SO4 and then removed in vacuum, yielding the free carboxylic acid compound 1d (1.79 g, 97%), which is used for next step synthesis without need for further purification.
1C. To a solution of the free acid obtained above (1.77, 4.64 mmol) in 5 ml DMF, D-β-vinyl cyclopropane amino acid ethyl ester 1e (0.95 g, 5 mmol), DIEA (4 ml, 4 eq.) and HATU (4 g, 2 eq) were added. The coupling is carried out at 0° C. over a period of 5 hour. The reaction mixture is diluted with 80 mL EtOAc, and followed by washing with 5% citric acid 2×20 ml, water 2×20 ml, 1M NaHCO3 4×20 ml and brine 2×10 ml, respectively. The organic phase is dried over anhydrous Na2SO4 and then evaporated. The residue is purified by silica gel flash chromatography using different ratios of hexanes:EtOAc as elution phase (5:1→3:1→1:1→1:2→1:5). The linear tripeptide 1f is isolated as an oil after removal of the elution solvents (1.59 g, 65.4%), identified by HPLC (Retention time=11.43 min) and MS (found 544.84, M+Na+).
1D. Ring Closing Metathesis (RCM). A solution of the linear tripeptide 1f (1.51 g, 2.89 mmol) in 200 ml dry DCM is deoxygenated by bubbling N2. Hoveyda's 1st generation catalyst (5 mol % eq.) is then added as solid. The reaction is refluxed under N2 atmosphere 12 hours. The solvent is evaporated and the residue is purified by silica gel flash chromatography using different ratios of hexanes:EtOAc as elution phase (9:1→5:1→3:1→1:1→1:2→1:5). The cyclic peptide precursor 1 is isolated as a white powder after removal of the elution solvents (1.24 g, 87%), identified by HPLC (Retention time=7.84 min, 30-70%, 90% B), and MS (found 516.28, M+Na+). For further details of the synthetic methods employed to produce the cyclic peptide precursor 1, see WO 00/059929 (2000).
Example 2
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen.
Step 2A.
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00163
To a cooled mixture of macrocyclic precursor 1,3-(thiophen-2-yl)-1H-quinoxalin-2-one 2a (1.1 equiv.), and triphenylphosphine (2 equiv.) in THF was added DIAD (2 equiv.) dropwise at 0° C. The resulting mixture was held at 0° C. for 15 min. before being warmed to room temperature. After 18 hours, the mixture was concentrated under vacuum and the residue was purified by chromatography eluting with 60% ethyl acetate-hexane to give 2b as a clear oil (35 mg, 99%).
MS (found): 704.4 (M+H). H1-NMR [CDCl3, δ (ppm)]: 8.6 (d, 1H), 8.0 (d, 1H), 7.8 (d, 1H), 7.6 (m, 2H), 7.5 (d, 2H), 7.2 (t, 1H), 7.0 (brs, 1H), 6.0 (brt, 1H), 5.5 (m, 1H), 5.3 (brd, 1H), 5.2 (t, 1H), 5.0 (m, 1H), 4.6 (brt, 1H), 4.1-4.3 (m, 3H), 3.1 (m, 1H), 5.3 (m, 1H), 2.1-2.3 (m, 2H), 1.3 (brs, 9H), 1.2 (t, 3H).
Step 2B.
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00164
A solution of compound 2b and lithium hydroxide (10 equiv.) in THF/MeOH/H2O (2:1:0.5) was stirred at room temperature for 20 hours. The excess solvents were evaporated in vacuo, the resulting residue was diluted with water, followed by acidification to pH ˜5. The mixture was extracted 2 times with ethyl acetate. The combined organic extracts were washed once with brine, dried (MgSO4), filtered and concentrated in vacuo to give an oily residue, which was purified by column chromatography eluting with 2-10% methanol-chloroform (87%).
MS (found): 676.3 1H-NMR [CD3OD, δ (ppm)]: 8.14 (1H), 7.96 (1H), 7.86 (1H), 7.65 (1H), 7.62 (1H), 7.59 (1H), 7.19 (1H), 6.07 (1H), 5.53 (1H), 5.52 (1H), 4.81 (1H), 4.75 (1H), 4.23 (1H), 4.12 (1H), 2.65-2.75 (2H), 2.52 (1H), 2.21 (1H), 1.97 (1H), 1.80 (1H), 1.62 (2H), 1.54 (1H), 1.47 (2H), 1.44 (2H), 1.41 (2H), 1.09 (9H). 13C-NMR [CD3OD, δ (ppm)]: 176.2, 174.1, 173.4, 156.0, 152.9, 141.0, 139.6, 138.9, 138.6, 131.5, 130.6, 130.0, 129.3, 128.1, 127.8, 127.1, 126.6, 78.6, 76.1, 59.8, 53.3, 52.3, 41.4, 34.5, 32.3, 30.0, 27.5, 27.4, 27.2 (3C), 26.1, 22.6, 22.4.
Example 3
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to
which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=2-(formamido)-thiazol-4-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen.
Step 3A.
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00165
Commercially available 4-Methoxy-benzene-1,2-diamine 3a (3.6 mmol) and (2-Formylamino-thiazol-4-yl)-oxo-acetic acid ethyl ester 3b (1 equiv.) in ethanol (40 mL) was heated to reflux for 5 hours. After the mixture was cooled to room temperature, the excess ethanol was evaporated in vacuo, and the residue was placed under high vacuum for 2 hours to give compound 3c as a greenish yellow powder.
MS (found): 303.1 (M+H). H1-NMR [DMSO-d, δ (ppm)]: 8.7 (s, 1H), 8.6 (m, 2H), 7.2-7.3 (m, 4H), 3.8 (s, 3H).
Step 3B.
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00166
To a cooled mixture of 1, quinoxalin-2-one 3c (1.1 equiv.), triphenylphosphine (2 equiv.) in THF was added DIAD (2 equiv.) dropwise at 0° C. The resulting mixture was kept at 0° C. for 15 min. before warming to room temperature. After 18 hours, the mixture was concentrated in vacuo and the residue was purified by chromatography eluting with 80-100% ethyl acetate-hexane to give 3d as a yellow oil.
MS (found): 778.5 (M+H).
Step 3C.
A solution of 3d and lithium hydroxide (10 equiv.) in THF/MeOH/H2O (2:1:0.5) was stirred at room temperature for 20 hours. The excess solvent was evaporated in vacuo, the residue was diluted with water and followed by acidification to pH ˜5. The mixture was extracted 2 times with ethyl acetate. The combined organic extracts were washed once with brine, dried (MgSO4), filtered and concentrated in vacuo to give a solid residue which was purified by HPLC to give.
MS (found): 750.4 (M+H). MS (found): 722.4 (M+H).
Example 4
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=ethyl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen.
The title compound is prepared with 3-ethyl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one and the title compound from Example 1 under the Mitsunobu conditions described in Example 2, followed by the reduction of the ethyl ester via treatment with LiOH as elucidated in Example 2.
Example 5
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=phenyl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen.
The title compound is prepared with 3-phenyl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one and the title compound from Example 1 under the Mitsunobu conditions described in Example 2, followed by the reduction of the ethyl ester via treatment with LiOH as elucidated in Example 2.
Example 6
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl W is absent, Z=4-methoxyphenyl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen.
The title compound is prepared with 3-(4-methoxyphenyl)-1H-quinoxalin-2-one and the title compound from Example 1 under the Mitsunobu conditions described in Example 2, followed by the reduction of the ethyl ester via treatment with LiOH as elucidated in Example 2.
Example 7
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=4-ethoxyphenyl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen.
The title compound is prepared with 3-(4-ethoxyphenyl)-1H-quinoxalin-2-one and the title compound from Example 1 under the Mitsunobu conditions described in Example 2, followed by the reduction of the ethyl ester via treatment with LiOH as elucidated in Example 2.
Example 8
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=5-bromothiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen.
The title compound is prepared with 3-(5-bromothiophen-2-yl)-1H-quinoxalin-2-one and the title compound from Example 1 under the Mitsunobu conditions described in Example 2, followed by the reduction of the ethyl ester via treatment with LiOH as elucidated in Example 2.
Example 9
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=2-pyrid-3-yl ethylenyl j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen.
The title compound is prepared with 3-[2-(pyrid-3-yl)-vinyl]-1H-quinoxalin-2-one and the title compound from Example 1 under the Mitsunobu conditions described in Example 2, followed by the reduction of the ethyl ester via treatment with LiOH as elucidated in Example 2.
Example 10
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=3,4-Dimethoxy-phenyl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen.
The title compound is prepared with 3-[2-(3,4-Dimethoxy-phenyl)-vinyl]-1H-quinoxalin-2-one and the title compound from Example 1 under the Mitsunobu conditions described in Example 2, followed by the reduction of the ethyl ester via treatment with LiOH as elucidated in Example 2.
Example 11
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=2-thiophen-2-yl ethylenyl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen.
The title compound is prepared with 3-[2-thiophen-2-ylvinyl]-1H-quinoxalin-2-one and the title compound from Example 1 under the Mitsunobu conditions described in Example 2, followed by the reduction of the ethyl ester via treatment with LiOH as elucidated in Example 2.
Example 12
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, Z=indole-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen.
Preparation of 3-(1H-Indol-3-yl)-1H-quinoxalin-2-one
The quinoxalin-2-one of the present example is prepared by heating the commercially available phenyl-1,2-diamine (3.6 mmol) and indole-3-glyoxylic acid (1 equiv.) in ethanol (40 mL) to reflux for 5 hours. After the mixture is cooled to room temperature, the excess ethanol was evaporated in vacuo, and the residue is placed under high vacuum for 2 hours to give 3-(1H-Indol-3-yl)-1H-quinoxalin-2-one.
Mitsunobu Coupling to Macrocycle
The title compound is prepared with 3-(1H-Indol-3-yl)-1H-quinoxalin-2-one and the title compound from Example 1 under the Mitsunobu conditions described in Example 2, followed by the reduction of the ethyl ester via treatment with LiOH as elucidated in Example 2.
Example 13
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=1H-indol-3-yl methyl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen.
Preparation of 3-(1H-Indol-3-ylmethyl)-1H-quinoxalin-2-one
The quinoxalin-2-one of the present example is prepared with phenyl-1,2-diamine and indole-3-pyruvic acid via the method described in Example 12 to afford 3-(1H-Indol-3-ylmethyl)-1H-quinoxalin-2-one.
Mitsunobu Coupling to Macrocycle
The title compound is prepared with 3-(1H-Indol-3-ylmethyl)-1H-quinoxalin-2-one and the title compound from Example 1 under the Mitsunobu conditions described in Example 2, followed by the reduction of the ethyl ester via treatment with LiOH as elucidated in Example 2.
Example 14
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=furan-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen.
Preparation of 3-(furan-2-yl)-1H-quinoxalin-2-one
The quinoxalin-2-one of the present example is prepared with phenyl-1,2-diamine and furan-2-yl glyoxylic acid via the method described in Example 12 to afford 3-(furan-2-yl)-1H-quinoxalin-2-one.
Mitsunobu Coupling to Macrocycle
The title compound is prepared with 3-(furan-2-yl)-1H-quinoxalin-2-one and the title compound from Example 1 under the Mitsunobu conditions described in Example 2, followed by the reduction of the ethyl ester via treatment with LiOH as elucidated in Example 2.
Example 15
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=1H-benzoimidazol-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen.
Preparation of 3-(1H-benzoimidazol-2-yl)-1-H-quinoxalin-2-one
The quinoxalin-2-one of the present example is prepared with phenyl-1,2-diamine and (1H-benzoimidazol-2-yl) oxo-acetic acid via the method described in Example 12 to afford 3-(1H-benzoimidazol-2-yl)-1H-quinoxalin-2-one.
Mitsunobu Coupling to Macrocycle
The title compound is prepared with 3-(1H-benzoimidazol-2-yl)-1H-quinoxalin-2-one and the title compound from Example 1 under the Mitsunobu conditions described in Example 2, followed by the reduction of the ethyl ester via treatment with LiOH as elucidated in Example 2.
Example 16
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl W is absent, Z=1H-imidazol-2-ylmethyl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen.
Preparation of 3-(1H-Imidazol-2-ylmethyl)-1H-quinoxalin-2-one
The quinoxalin-2-one of the present example is prepared with phenyl-1,2-diamine and (1H-benzoimidazol-2-yl) oxo-acetic acid via the method described in Example 12 to afford 3-(1H-Imidazol-2-ylmethyl)-1H-quinoxalin-2-one.
Mitsunobu Coupling to Macrocycle
The title compound is prepared with 3-(1H-Imidazol-2-ylmethyl)-1H-quinoxalin-2-one and the title compound from Example 1 under the Mitsunobu conditions described in Example 2, followed by the reduction of the ethyl ester via treatment with LiOH as elucidated in Example 2.
Example 17
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OEt, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=chloro, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen.
Preparation of 3-chloro-1H-quinoxalin-2-one
The quinoxalin-2-one of the present example is prepared with phenyl-1,2-diamine and oxalic acid via the method described in Example 12 to afford the 1,4-Dihydro quinoaxline-2,3-dione. The 1,4-Dihydro quinoaxline-2,3-dione is then treated with SOCl2 in 2.5% DMF:toluene, heated to 130° C., stirred for 2 h, filtered and concentrated to afford the 3-chloro-1H-quinoxalin-2-one in crude form.
Mitsunobu Coupling to Macrocycle
The title compound is prepared with 3-chloro-1H-quinoxalin-2-one and the title compound from Example 1 under the Mitsunobu conditions described in Example 2.
Example 18
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, Z=thiophen-3-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen.
To a mixture of the title compound of Example 17 (0.055 mmol), 3-thiophene boronic acid (0.28 mmol), cesium carbonate (0.22 mmol), potassium fluoride monohydrate (0.44 mmol) is placed in a round bottom flask and is flushed twice with nitrogen. To this mixture is added DME and the resulting solution is flushed again with nitrogen before palladium tetrakis(triphenylphopshine) (10 mol %) is added. After flushing two more times with nitrogen, the mixture is heated to reflux for 20 hours. The mixture is then cooled and then diluted with water and extracted three times with EtOAc. The combined EtOAc layers are washed once with brine, dried (MgSO4), filtered and concentrated in vacuo. The residue is purified by column chromatography eluting with 20-40% EtOAc-hexane to yield the ethyl ester precursor of the title compound. The ethyl ester is then hydrolyzed to the free acid via treatment with LiOH as elucidated in Example 2 to arrive at the title compound.
Example 19
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=2-pyrid-3-yl acetylenyl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen.
The title compound is prepared by reaction of a degassed solution of the title compound from Example 17 (4 mmol), 2-pyrid-3-yl acetylene (4 mmol), and 1 ml of triethylamine and 10 ml of acetonitrile with PdCl2(PPh3)2 (0.2 mmol) and CuI (0.1 mmol). The resulting reaction mixture is degassed and stirred for 5 minutes at room temperature. The reaction is then heated to 90° C. and stirred for 12 hours. Subsequently, the reaction mixture is concentrated in vacuo and purified by silica column to afford the ethyl ester of the title compound. The ethyl ester is then hydrolyzed to the free acid via treatment with LiOH as elucidated in Example 2 to arrive at the title compound.
Example 20
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=2,3-dihydrobenzofuran-5-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen.
To a degassed solution of the title compound of Example 17 (1 mmol) and 2,3-dihydrobenzofuran-5-yl stannane (2 mmol) is added Pd(PPh3)4 (10 mol %). The mixture is degassed with nitrogen two additional times and heated to 100° C. for 3 hours. The cooled mixture is concentrated in vacuo and the residue is purified by column chromatography (30% EtOAc/Hexane) to give the ethyl ester of the title compound. The ethyl ester is then hydrolyzed via treatment with LiOH as elucidated in Example 2 to give the title compound.
Example 21
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W=—NH—, Z=propargyl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen.
The title compound is formed by reacting a 0.1M solution of the title compound from Example 17 in DMF with propargylamine (1.2 equiv.) in the presence of K2CO3 (2 equiv.) at room temperature for 5-12 hours. The resulting reaction mixture is then extracted with EtOAc, washed with NaHCO3, water, and brine, and the washed extract is concentrated in vacuo. The residue is then purified by silica chromatography to yield the ethyl ester of the title compound. The ethyl ester is then hydrolyzed to the free acid via treatment with LiOH to arrive upon the title compound.
Example 22
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W=—N(ethyl)-, Z=benzyl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen.
The title compound is formed by reacting a 0.1M solution of the title compound from Example 17 in DMF with benzylethylamine (1.2 equiv.) in the presence of K2CO3 (2 equiv.) at room temperature for 5-12 hours. The resulting reaction mixture is then extracted with EtOAc, washed with NaHCO3, water, and brine, and the washed extract is concentrated in vacuo. The residue is then purified by silica chromatography to yield the ethyl ester of the title compound. The ethyl ester is then hydrolyzed to the free acid via treatment with LiOH to arrive upon the title compound.
Example 23
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W=—NH—, Z=pyrid-3-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen.
The title compound is formed by reacting a 0.1M solution of the title compound from Example 17 in DMF with 3-aminopyridine (1.2 equiv.) in the presence of K2CO3 (2 equiv.) at room temperature for 5-12 hours. The resulting reaction mixture is then extracted with EtOAc, washed with NaHCO3, water, and brine, and the washed extract is concentrated in vacuo. The residue is then purified by silica chromatography to yield the ethyl ester of the title compound. The ethyl ester is then hydrolyzed to the free acid via treatment with LiOH to arrive upon the title compound.
Example 24
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=tetrazolyl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen.
The title compound is formed by reacting a 0.1M solution of the title compound from Example 17 in DMF with tetrazole (1.2 equiv.) in the presence of K2CO3 (2 equiv.) at room temperature for 5-12 hours. The resulting reaction mixture is then extracted with EtOAc, washed with NaHCO3, water, and brine, and the washed extract is concentrated in vacuo. The residue is then purified by silica chromatography to yield the ethyl ester of the title compound. The ethyl ester is then hydrolyzed to the free acid via treatment with LiOH to arrive upon the title compound.
Example 25
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=morpholino, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen.
The title compound is formed by reacting a 0.1M solution of the title compound from Example 17 in DMF with morpholine (1.2 equiv.) in the presence of K2CO3 (2 equiv.) at room temperature for 5-12 hours. The resulting reaction mixture is then extracted with EtOAc, washed with NaHCO3, water, and brine, and the washed extract is concentrated in vacuo. The residue is then purified by silica chromatography to yield the ethyl ester of the title compound. The ethyl ester is then hydrolyzed to the free acid via treatment with LiOH to arrive upon the title compound.
Example 26
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W=—O—, Z=thiophen-3-yl-methyl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen.
The title compound is formed by reacting a 0.1M solution of the title compound from Example 17 in DMF with thiophen-3-yl methanol (1.2 equiv.) in the presence of K2CO3 (2 equiv.) at room temperature for 5-12 hours. The resulting reaction mixture is then extracted with EtOAc, washed with NaHCO3, water, and brine, and the washed extract is concentrated in vacuo. The residue is then purified by silica chromatography to yield the ethyl ester of the title compound. The ethyl ester is then hydrolyzed to the free acid via treatment with LiOH to arrive upon the title compound.
Example 27
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00167

W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen.
Preparation of 7-Methoxy-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one
The quinoxalin-2-one of the present example is prepared with 4-Methoxy-benzene-1,2-diamine and (thiophen-2-yl) oxo-acetic acid via the method described in Example 12 to afford 7-Methoxy-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one.
Mitsunobu Coupling to Macrocycle
The title compound is prepared with 7-Methoxy-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one and the title compound from Example 1 under the Mitsunobu conditions described in Example 2, followed by the reduction of the ethyl ester via treatment with LiOH as elucidated in Example 2.
Example 28
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00168

W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen.
Preparation of 7-Methoxy-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one
The 2-nitro amide precursor of the present example is prepared with 4-Methoxy-2-nitroaniline (1 equiv.) and 2-(thiophen-2-yl) oxoacetic acid (1 equiv.) in DMF in the presence of DCC at room temperature to 80° C. to arrive at the precursor 2-nitro amide (N-(4-Methoxy-2-nitro-phenyl)-2-oxo-2-thiophen-2-yl-acetamide). The precursor 2-nitro amide is subjected to catalytic hydrogenation conditions (H2/Pd/C in MeOH) forming the amine followed by ring closure to form 6-Methoxy-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one.
Mitsunobu Coupling to Macrocycle
The title compound is prepared with 6-Methoxy-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one and the title compound from Example 1 under the Mitsunobu conditions described in Example 2, followed by the reduction of the ethyl ester via treatment with LiOH as elucidated in Example 2.
Example 29
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00169

W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen.
Preparation of 6,7-Methoxy-3-thiophen-2-yl-1-H-quinoxalin-2-one
The quinoxalin-2-one of the present example is prepared with 4,5-Dimethoxy-benzene-1,2-diamine and (thiophen-2-yl) oxo-acetic acid via the method described in Example 12 to afford 6,7-Methoxy-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one.
Mitsunobu Coupling to Macrocycle
The title compound is prepared with 6,7-Methoxy-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one and the title compound from Example 1 under the Mitsunobu conditions described in Example 2, followed by the reduction of the ethyl ester via treatment with LiOH as elucidated in Example 2.
Example 30
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00170

W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen.
Preparation of 6-cyano-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one
The quinoxalin-2-one of the present example is prepared with 4-cyano-benzene-1,2-diamine and (thiophen-2-yl) oxo-acetic acid via the method described in Example 12 to afford 6-cyano-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one.
Mitsunobu Coupling to Macrocycle
The title compound is prepared with 6-cyano-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one and the title compound from Example 1 under the Mitsunobu conditions described in Example 2, followed by the reduction of the ethyl ester via treatment with LiOH as elucidated in Example 2.
Example 31
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00171

W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen.
Preparation of 6-tetrazol-5-yl-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one
The quinoxalin-2-one of the present example is prepared with 4-cyano-benzene-1,2-diamine and (thiophen-2-yl) oxo-acetic acid via the method described in Example 12 to afford 6-cyano-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one. The cyano compound is then treated with NaN3 (5 eqiv.), Et3N (3 equiv.), in Xylenes in a sealed tube and heated to 140° C. and stirred 12 hours to afford the 6-tetrazol-5-yl-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one after extraction and purification.
Mitsunobu Coupling to Macrocycle
The title compound is prepared with 6-tetrazol-5-yl-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one and the title compound from Example 1 under the Mitsunobu conditions described in Example 2, followed by the reduction of the ethyl ester via treatment with LiOH as elucidated in Example 2.
Example 32
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00172

W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen.
Preparation of 2-Thiophen-2-yl-4H-pyrido[2,3-b]pyrazin-3-one
The quinoxalin-2-one of the present example is prepared with 2,3-diamino pyridine and (thiophen-2-yl) oxo-acetic acid via the method described in Example 12 to afford 2-thiophen-2-yl-4H-pyrido[2,3-b]pyrazin-3-one.
Mitsunobu Coupling to Macrocycle
The title compound is prepared with 2-thiophen-2-yl-4H-pyrido[2,3-b]pyrazin-3-one and the title compound from Example 1 under the Mitsunobu conditions described in Example 2, followed by the reduction of the ethyl ester via treatment with LiOH as elucidated in Example 2.
Example 33
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00173

W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen
Preparation of 7-Thiophen-2-yl-5H-1,3-dioxa-5,8-diazacyclopenta[b]naphthalen-6-one
The quinoxalin-2-one of the present example is prepared with Benzo[1,3]dioxole-5,6-diamine and (thiophen-2-yl) oxo-acetic acid via the method described in Example 12 to afford 7-thiophen-2-yl-5H-1,3-dioxa-5,8-diaza-cyclopenta[b]naphthalen-6-one.
Mitsunobu Coupling to Macrocycle
The title compound is prepared with 7-thiophen-2-yl-5H-1,3-dioxa-5,8-diaza-cyclopenta[b]naphthalen-6-one and the title compound from Example 1 under the Mitsunobu conditions described in Example 2, followed by the reduction of the ethyl ester via treatment with LiOH as elucidated in Example 2.
Example 34
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00174

W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen.
Preparation of 3-Thiophen-2-yl-1H-benzo[g]quinoxalin-2-one
The quinoxalin-2-one of the present example is prepared with napthylene-2,3-diamine and (thiophen-2-yl) oxo-acetic acid via the method described in Example 12 to afford 3-Thiophen-2-yl-1H-benzo[g]quinoxalin-2-one.
Mitsunobu Coupling to Macrocycle
The title compound is prepared with 3-Thiophen-2-yl-1H-benzo[g]quinoxalin-2-one and the title compound from Example 1 under the Mitsunobu conditions described in Example 2, followed by the reduction of the ethyl ester via treatment with LiOH as elucidated in Example 2.
Example 35
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00175

W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen.
Preparation of 6-Methanesulfonyl-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one
The quinoxalin-2-one of the present example is prepared with 4-Methanesulfonyl-benzene-1,2-diamine and (thiophen-2-yl) oxo-acetic acid via the method described in Example 12 to afford 6-Methanesulfonyl-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one.
Mitsunobu Coupling to Macrocycle
The title compound is prepared with 6-Methanesulfonyl-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one and the title compound from Example 1 under the Mitsunobu conditions described in Example 2, followed by the reduction of the ethyl ester via treatment with LiOH as elucidated in Example 2.
Example 36
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=Wbsent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00176

W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen.
Preparation of 2-Oxo-3-thiophen-2-yl-1,2-dihydro-quinoxaline-6-sulfonic acid
The quinoxalin-2-one of the present example is prepared with 3,4-Diamino-benzenesulfonic acid and (thiophen-2-yl) oxo-acetic acid via the method described in Example 12 to afford 2-Oxo-3-thiophen-2-yl-1,2-dihydro-quinoxaline-6-sulfonic acid.
Mitsunobu Coupling to Macrocycle
The title compound is prepared with 2-Oxo-3-thiophen-2-yl-1,2-dihydro-quinoxaline-6-sulfonic acid and the title compound from Example 1 under the Mitsunobu conditions described in Example 2, followed by the reduction of the ethyl ester via treatment with LiOH as elucidated in Example 2.
Example 37
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00177

W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen.
Preparation of 6-Hydroxymethyl-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one
The quinoxalin-2-one of the present example is prepared with (3,4-Diamino-phenyl)-methanol and (thiophen-2-yl) oxo-acetic acid via the method described in Example 12 to afford 6-Hydroxymethyl-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one.
Mitsunobu Coupling to Macrocycle
The title compound is prepared with 6-Hydroxymethyl-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one and the title compound from Example 1 under the Mitsunobu conditions described in Example 2, followed by the reduction of the ethyl ester via treatment with LiOH as elucidated in Example 2.
Example 38
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00178

W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen.
Preparation of 6-Piperidin-1-ylmethyl-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one
The quinoxalin-2-one of the present example is prepared first via Swern oxidation with DMSO and (COCl)2 of 6-Hydroxymethyl-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one to form 2-Oxo-3-thiophen-2-yl-1,2-dihydro-quinoxaline-6-carbaldehyde. The 6-carboxaldehyde compound then undergoes reductive amination with piperidine in acetonitrile in the presence of NaCNBH3 and acetic acid to afford, after an aqueous workup and purification, 6-Piperidin-1-ylmethyl-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one.
Mitsunobu Coupling to Macrocycle
The title compound is prepared with 6-Piperidin-1-ylmethyl-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one and the title compound from Example 1 under the Mitsunobu conditions described in Example 2, followed by the reduction of the ethyl ester via treatment with LiOH as elucidated in Example 2.
Example 39
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00179

W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen.
Preparation of 6-Nitro-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one
The quinoxalin-2-one of the present example is prepared with 4-Nitro-benzene-1,2-diamine and (thiophen-2-yl) oxo-acetic acid via the method described in Example 12 to afford 6-Nitro-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one.
Mitsunobu Coupling to Macrocycle
The title compound is prepared with 6-Nitro-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one and the title compound from Example 1 under the Mitsunobu conditions described in Example 2, followed by the reduction of the ethyl ester via treatment with LiOH as elucidated in Example 2.
Example 40
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00180

W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen.
Preparation of 6-amino-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one
The quinoxalin-2-one of the present example is prepared by reducing 6-nitro-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one of Example 39 with H2NNH2.H2O in the presence of Pd/C in refluxing MeOH.
Mitsunobu Coupling to Macrocycle
The title compound is prepared with 6-amino-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one and the title compound from Example 1 under the Mitsunobu conditions described in Example 2, followed by the reduction of the ethyl ester via treatment with LiOH as elucidated in Example 2.
Example 41
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00181

W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R3=R6=hydrogen.
Preparation of N-(2-Oxo-3-thiophen-2-yl-1,2-dihydroquinoxalin-6-yl)-2-phenyl-acetamide
The quinoxalin-2-one of the present example is prepared by treating 6-amino-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one of Example 40 with phenethyl acid chloride to afford, after workup and purification, N-(2-Oxo-3-thiophen-2-yl-1,2-dihydro-quinoxalin-6-yl)-2-phenyl-acetamide.
Mitsunobu Coupling to Macrocycle
The title compound is prepared with N-(2-Oxo-3-thiophen-2-yl-1,2-dihydro-quinoxalin-6-yl)-2-phenyl-acetamide and the title compound from Example 1 under the Mitsunobu conditions described in Example 2, followed by the reduction of the ethyl ester via treatment with LiOH as elucidated in Example 2.
Example 42
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00182

W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen.
Preparation of 6-Nitro-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one
The quinoxalin-2-one of the present example is prepared with 4-Nitro-benzene-1,2-diamine and (thiophen-2-yl) oxo-acetic acid via the method described in Example 12 to afford 6-Nitro-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one.
Mitsunobu Coupling to Macrocycle
The title compound is prepared with 6-Nitro-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one and the title compound from Example 1 under the Mitsunobu conditions described in Example 2, followed by the reduction of the ethyl ester via treatment with LiOH as elucidated in Example 2.
Example 43
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00183

W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen.
Preparation of 6-hydroxy-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one
The quinoxalin-2-one of the present example is prepared with 3,4-diaminophenol (which is prepared by treating 3,4-dinitrophenol with H2NNH2.H2O, Pd/C refluxed in MeOH), and (thiophen-2-yl) oxo-acetic acid via the method described in Example 12 to afford 6-hydroxy-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one.
Mitsunobu Coupling to Macrocycle
The title compound is prepared with 6-hydroxy-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one and the title compound from Example 1 under the Mitsunobu conditions described in Example 2, followed by the reduction of the ethyl ester via treatment with LiOH as elucidated in Example 2.
Example 44
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00184

W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen.
Preparation of 6-Benzyloxy-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one
The quinoxalin-2-one of the present example is prepared treating 6-hydroxy-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one from Example 43 in DMF with bromomethyl benzene in the presence of K2CO3 at a temperature between 25° C. to 80° C. The resulting reaction mixture, after workup and purification, affords 6-benzyloxy-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one.
Mitsunobu Coupling to Macrocycle
The title compound is prepared with 6-benzyloxy-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one and the title compound from Example 1 under the Mitsunobu conditions described in Example 2, followed by the reduction of the ethyl ester via treatment with LiOH as elucidated in Example 2.
Example 45
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00185

W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen.
Preparation of 2-Oxo-3-thiophen-2-yl-1,2-dihydro-quinoxaline-6-carboxylic acid ethyl ester
The quinoxalin-2-one of the present example is prepared with 3,4-Diamino-benzoic acid ethyl ester and (thiophen-2-yl) oxo-acetic acid via the method described in Example 12 to afford 2-Oxo-3-thiophen-2-yl-1,2-dihydro-quinoxaline-6-carboxylic acid ethyl ester.
Mitsunobu Coupling to Macrocycle
The title compound is prepared with 2-Oxo-3-thiophen-2-yl-1,2-dihydro-quinoxaline-6-carboxylic acid ethyl ester and the title compound from Example 1 under the Mitsunobu conditions described in Example 2, followed by the reduction of the ethyl esters via treatment with LiOH as elucidated in Example 2.
Example 46
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00186

W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen.
Preparation of 6-Phenylacetyl-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one
Step 40a
The quinoxalin-2-one of the present example is prepared with 2-Oxo-3-thiophen-2-yl-1,2-dihydro-quinoxaline-6-carboxylic acid ethyl ester from Example 45 via the hydrolysis of the ethyl ester according to the procedure of Example 2 to afford the carboxylic acid.
Step 40b
The carboxylic acid is then dissolved in DMF in the presence of DCC and triethylamine and to the resulting reaction mixture is added (MeO)NHMe to form Weinreb's amide. The Weinreb's amide is then treated with magnesium benzyl bromide in THF at −75° C. to afford, after extraction and purification, the 6-Phenylacetyl-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one.
Mitsunobu Coupling to Macrocycle
The title compound is prepared with 6-Phenylacetyl-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one and the title compound from Example 1 under the Mitsunobu conditions described in Example 2, followed by the reduction of the ethyl esters via treatment with LiOH as elucidated in Example 2.
Example 47
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00187

W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen.
Preparation of 2-Oxo-3-thiophen-2-yl-1,2-dihydro-quinoxaline-6-carboxylic acid benzylamide
Step 41a
The quinoxalin-2-one of the present example is prepared with 2-Oxo-3-thiophen-2-yl-1,2-dihydro-quinoxaline-6-carboxylic acid benzylamide from Example 45 via the hydrolysis of the ethyl ester according to the procedure of Example 2 to afford the carboxylic acid.
Step 41b
The carboxylic acid is then dissolved in DMF in the presence of DCC and triethylamine and to the resulting reaction mixture is added benzyl amine to afford, after extraction and purification, 2-Oxo-3-thiophen-2-yl-1,2-dihydro-quinoxaline-6-carboxylic acid benzylamide.
Mitsunobu Coupling to Macrocycle
The title compound is prepared with 2-Oxo-3-thiophen-2-yl-1,2-dihydro-quinoxaline-6-carboxylic acid benzylamide and the title compound from Example 1 under the Mitsunobu conditions described in Example 2, followed by the reduction of the ethyl esters via treatment with LiOH as elucidated in Example 2.
Example 48
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00188

W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen.
Preparation of 6-Phenethyl-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one
The quinoxalin-2-one of the present example is prepared with 6-Phenylacetyl-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one from Example 46 via treatment with H2/Pd—C in the presence of acetic acid to form the 6-phenethyl compound.
Mitsunobu Coupling to Macrocycle
The title compound is prepared with 6-Phenethyl-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one and the title compound from Example 1 under the Mitsunobu conditions described in Example 2, followed by the reduction of the ethyl esters via treatment with LiOH as elucidated in Example 2.
Example 49
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OEt, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00189

W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen.
Preparation of 6-bromo-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one
The quinoxalin-2-one of the present example is prepared with 4-bromo-2-nitroaniline and (thiophen-2-yl) oxo-acetic acid via the method described in Example 12 to afford 6-bromo-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one.
Mitsunobu Coupling to Macrocycle
The title compound is prepared with 6-bromo-3-thiophen-2-yl-1H-quinoxalin-2-one and the title compound from Example 1 under the Mitsunobu conditions described in Example 2 to afford the title compound.
Example 50
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00190

W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen.
To a degassed solution of the title compound of Example 49 (1 mmol) and thiazol-2yl stannane (2 mmol) is added Pd(PPh3)4 (10 mol %). The mixture is degassed with nitrogen two additional times and heated to 100° C. for 3 hours. The cooled mixture is concentrated in vacuo and the residue is purified by column chromatography (30% EtOAc/Hexane) to give the ethyl ester of the title compound. The ethyl ester is then hydrolyzed via treatment with LiOH as elucidated in Example 2 to give the title compound.
Example 51
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00191

W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen.
To a mixture of the title compound of Example 49 (0.055 mmol), phenyl boronic acid (0.28 mmol), cesium carbonate (0.22 mmol), potassium fluoride monohydrate (0.44 mmol) is placed in a round bottom flask and is flushed twice with nitrogen. To this mixture is added DME and the resulting solution is flushed again with nitrogen before palladium tetrakis(triphenylphopshine) (10 mol %) is added. After flushing two more times with nitrogen, the mixture is heated to reflux for 20 hours. The mixture is then cooled and then diluted with water and extracted three times with EtOAc. The combined EtOAc layers are washed once with brine, dried (MgSO4), filtered and concentrated in vacuo. The residue is purified by column chromatography eluting with 20-40% EtOAc-hexane to yield the ethyl ester precursor of the title compound. The ethyl ester is then hydrolyzed to the free acid via treatment with LiOH as elucidated in Example 2 to arrive at the title compound.
Example 52
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00192

W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, R5=R6=hydrogen.
The title compound is prepared by reaction of a degassed solution of the title compound from Example 49 (4 mmol), 2-pyrid-3-yl acetylene (4 mmol), and 1 ml of triethylamine and 10 ml of acetonitrile with PdCl2(PPh3)2 (0.2 mmol) and CuI (0.1 mmol). The resulting reaction mixture is degassed and stirred for 5 minutes at room temperature. The reaction is then heated to 90° C. and stirred for 12 hours. Subsequently, the reaction mixture is concentrated in vacuo and purified by silica column to afford the ethyl ester of the title compound. The ethyl ester is then hydrolyzed to the free acid via treatment with LiOH as elucidated in Example 2 to arrive at the title compound.
Example 53
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00193

W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, R5=R6=hydrogen.
The title compound is prepared by adding to a dry mixture of the title compound from Example 49 (0.068 mmol), imidazole (2 eq.), Cs2CO3 (3 eq.), Xantphos (30 mol %), and Pd(OAc)2 under nitrogen dioxane. The reaction mixture is then degassed and stirred at 75° C. for 18 hours. Upon completion of the reaction, monitored via TLC, the reaction mixture is diluted with DCM, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo. The reaction mixture is then purified via silica column chromatography with 5% MeOH/CHCl3 to afford the ethyl ester of the title compound. The ethyl ester is then hydrolyzed by the conditions set forth in Example 2 to afford the title compound.
Example 54
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=—(C═O)—O—R1, wherein R1=cyclopentyl, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen.
54a—Amine Deprotection.
0.041 mmol of the title compound of Example 2 is dissolved in 4 ml of a 4M solution of HCl in dioxane and stirred for 1 hour. The reaction residue 54a is concentrated in vacuo.
54b—Chloroformate Reagent
The chloroformate reagent 54b is prepared by dissolving 0.045 mmol of cyclopentanol in THF (3 ml) and adding 0.09 mmol of phosgene in toluene (20%). The resulting reaction mixture is stirred at room temperature for 2 hours and the solvent is removed in vacuo. To the residue is added DCM and subsequently concentrated to dryness twice in vacuo yielding chloroformate reagent 54b.
54c—Carbamate Formation
The title carbamate is prepared by dissolving residue 54a in 1 ml of THF, adding 0.045 mmol of TEA, and cooling the resulting reaction mixture to 0° C. To this 0° C. reaction mixture is added chloroformate reagent 54b in 3 ml of THF. The resulting reaction mixture is reacted for 2 hours at 0° C., extracted with EtOAc, washed by 1M sodium bicarbonate, water and brine, dried over MgSO4, and concentrated in vacuo to dryness. The crude compound is purified by silica column and the ethyl ester is subsequently hydrolyzed by the procedure set forth in Example 2.
Example 55
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=—(C═O)—O—R1, wherein R1=cyclobutyl, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen.
The title compound is prepared by the method described in Example 54 with the title compound of Example 2 and cyclobutanol.
Example 56
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=—(C═O)—O—R1, wherein R1=cyclohexyl, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen.
The title compound is prepared by the method described in Example 54 with the title compound of Example 2 and cyclohexanol.
Example 57
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=—(C═O)—O—R1, wherein R1=
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00194

G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen.
The title compound is prepared by the method described in Example 54 with the title compound of Example 2 and (R)-3-hydroxytetrahydrofuran.
Example 58
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=—(C═O)—O—R1, wherein R1=
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00195

G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen.
The title compound is prepared by the method described in Example 54 with the title compound of Example 2 and (S)-3-hydroxytetrahydrofuran.
Example 59
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=—(C═O)—O—R1, wherein R1=
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00196

G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen.
The title compound is prepared by the method described in Example 54 with the title compound of Example 2 and
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00197
Example 60
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=—(C═O)—R1, wherein R1=cyclopentyl, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen.
The title compound is prepared with the title compound from Example 2 in 4 ml of a 4M solution of HCl in dioxane and stirring the reaction mixture for 1 hour. The reaction residue is concentrated in vacuo. To this residue, 4 ml of THF and 0.045 mmol of TEA is added, the mixture is cooled to 0° C., to which is added 0.045 mmol of the cyclopentyl acid chloride. The resulting reaction mixture is stirred for 2 hours at 0° C. The reaction mixture is then extracted with EtOAc, washed with 1M sodium bicarbonate, water and brine, dried over MgSO4 and concentrated to dryness in vacuo. The crude compound is purified by silica column and the ethyl ester is subsequently hydrolyzed by the procedure set forth in Example 2.
Example 61
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=—(C═O)—NH—R1, wherein R1=cyclopentyl, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R5=hydrogen
The title compound is prepared with the title compound from Example 2 in 4 ml of a 4M solution of HCl in dioxane and stirring for 1 hour. The resulting reaction residue is concentrated in vacuo, dissolved in 4 ml THF, and cooled to 0° C. To the 0° C. solution is added 0.045 mmol of cyclopentyl isocyanate and the resulting reaction mixture is stirred at room temperature for 4 hours. The solution is then extracted with EtOAc, washed with 1% HCl, water and brine, dried over MgSO4, and concentrated in vacuo to dryness. The crude compound is purified by silica column and the ethyl ester is subsequently hydrolyzed by the procedure set forth in Example 2.
Example 62
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=—(C═S)—NH—R1, wherein R1=cyclopentyl G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen
The title compound is prepared with the title compound from Example 2 in 4 ml of a 4M solution of HCl in dioxane and stirring for 1 hour. The resulting reaction residue is concentrated in vacuo, dissolved in 4 ml THF, and cooled to 0° C. To the 0° C. solution is added 0.045 mmol of cyclopentyl isothiocyanate and the resulting reaction mixture is stirred at room temperature for 4 hours. The solution is then extracted with EtOAc, washed with 1% HCl, water and brine, dried over MgSO4, and concentrated in vacuo to dryness. The crude compound is purified by silica column and the ethyl ester is subsequently hydrolyzed by the procedure set forth in Example 2.
Example 63
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=—S(O)2—R1, wherein R1=cyclopentyl, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen.
The title compound is prepared with the title compound from Example 2 in 4 ml of a 4M solution of HCl in dioxane and stirring for 1 hour. To the resulting concentrated reaction residue, which has been dissolved in 4 ml THF, is added 0.045 mmol of TEA, and cooled to 0° C. To the 0° C. solution is added 0.045 mmol of cyclopentyl sulfonyl chloride and the resulting reaction mixture is stirred at 0° C. for 2 hours. The solution is then extracted with EtOAc, washed with 1M sodium bicarbonate, water and brine, dried over MgSO4, and concentrated in vacuo to dryness. The crude compound is purified by silica column and the ethyl ester is subsequently hydrolyzed by the procedure set forth in Example 2.
Example 64
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=—(C═O)—O—R1, R1=cyclopentyl, G=—O-phenethyl, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1 and R5=R6=hydrogen.
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00198
The title compound is prepared by adding to a solution of the title compound of Example 54 and phenethyl alcohol 64a in 0.5 ml DCM, is added 1.2 eq. PyBrOP, 4 eq. DIEA, and catalytic amount of DMAP at °0 C. The resulting reaction mixture is stirred for 1 hour at 0° C. and then warmed to room temperature over a period of 4-12 hours. The reaction mixture is purified by silica gel flash chromatography using different ratios of hexanes:EtOAc as elution phase (9:1→5:1→3:1→1:1) to afford the title compound isolated phenethyl ester 64b.
Other esters can be made using the same procedures.
Example 65
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=—(C═O)—O—R1, R1=cyclopentyl, G=—NH-phenethyl, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen.
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00199
The title compound is prepared by adding to a solution of the title compound of Example 54 and phenethyl amine 65a (0.05 ml) in 0.5 ml DMF, EDC (1.2 eq.) and DIEA (4 eq.) at °0 C. The resulting reaction mixture is stirred at 1 hour. Subsequently, the reaction is warmed to room temperature over a period of 4-12 hours. The reaction mixture is purified by silica gel flash chromatography using different ratios of hexanes:EtOAc as elution phase (9:1→5:1→3:1→1:1) to afford title compound phenethyl amide 65b. Other amides can be made via the same procedure.
Example 66
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=—(C═O)—O—R1, R1=cyclopentyl, G=—NHS(O)-phenethyl L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00200
The title compound is prepared by adding to a solution of the title compound of Example 54 and α-toluenesulfonamide 66a (10 mg) in 0.5 ml DCM, is added 1.2 eq. PyBrOP, 4 eq. DIEA, and catalytic amount of DMAP at °0 C. The resulting reaction mixture is stirred for 1 hour and then allowed to warm to room temperature over a period of 4-12 hours. The reaction mixture is purified by silica gel flash chromatography using different ratios of hexanes:EtOAc as elution phase (9:1→5:1→3:1→1:1) to afford the title compound sulfonamide 66b. Other sulfonamides can be made via the same procedure.
Example 67
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=—(C═O)—O—R1, R1=cyclopentyl G=—(C═O)—OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3 m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen.
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00201
The title compound is prepared by adding to a solution of the title compound of Example 54 in 0.5 ml DMF, EDC (1.2 eq.) and DIEA (4 eq.) at °0 C. The resulting reaction mixture is stirred at 1 hour. Subsequently, the reaction is warmed to room temperature over a period of 4-12 hours. The reaction mixture is purified by silica gel flash chromatography to afford hydroxyamide. The hydroyamide is then treated with DIBAL-H at −78° C. in THF for 2 hours. The reaction mixture is then diluted with 8 ml EtOAc, washed with water and brine, dried over Na2SO4, and concentrated in vacuo to yield aldehyde 67a. To a solution of aldehyde 67a in 0.5 ml THF, is added α-hydroxy-α-methyl-propionitrile (0.1 ml) and catalytic amount TFA at °0C. The resulting reaction mixture is warmed from °0 C. to room temperature over a period of 4-12 hours followed by hydrolysis with concentrated hydrochloric acid in dioxane. The reaction is then extracted with EtOAc, and washed with water and brine to yield α-hydroxy compound 67b in its crude form. The crude compound 67b undergoes a Dess-Martin oxidation in THF (0.5 ml), providing the α-carbonyl compound 67c in crude form. The crude 67c is purified by silica gel flash chromatography using different ratios of hexanes:EtOAc as elution phase (9:1→5:1→3:1→1:1) to afford the title compound isolated keto acid 67c.
Example 68
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=—(C═O)—O—R1, R1=cyclopentyl, G=—(C═O)—O-phenethyl, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen
The title compound is prepared with the title compound keto acid of Example 67 and phenethanol according to the procedure set forth in Example 64.
Example 69
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=—(C═O)—C—R1, R1=cyclopentyl, G=—(C═O)—NH-phenethyl, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen
The title compound is prepared with the title compound keto acid of Example 67 and phenethyl amine according to the procedure set forth in Example 65.
Example 70
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=—(C═O)—O—R1, R1=cyclopentyl, G=—(C═O)—NH—S(O)2-benzyl, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen.
The title compound is prepared with the title compound keto acid of Example 67 and α-toluenesulfonamide according to the procedure set forth in Example 66.
Example 71
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=—(C═O)CH2—, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen.
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00202
Synthesis of (2S)—N-Boc-amino-5-oxo-non-8-enoic acid
71A. The aforementioned amino acid is prepared by adding to a solution of monoallyl ester of malonic acid in dry THF under N2 at −78° C., n-Bu2Mg dropwise over a period of 5 min. The resulting suspension is then stirred at room temperature for 1 hour and evaporated to dryness. Solid Mg salt 71b, is dried under vacuum.
Glutamic acid derivative 71a is first mixed with 1,1′-carbonyldiimidazole in anhydrous THF and the mixture is stirred at room temperature for 1 hour to activate the free acid moiety. Subsequently, the activated glutamic acid derivative is cannulated into a solution of Mg salt 49b and the reaction mixture obtained is stirred at room temperature for 16 hours. The mixture then is diluted with ethyl acetate and the organic solution is washed with 0.5 N HCl (at 0° C.) and brine, dried and evaporated. The residue obtained is resolved via silica chromatography with a 35-40% ethyl acetate in hexanes eluent system to yield diester 71c.
71B. To a stirred solution of tetrakis (triphenylphosphine) Pd (0) in dry DMF is added the diester in DMF. The mixture is stirred at room temperature for 3.5 hours. The DMF is evaporated under reduced pressure and the residue diluted with EtOAc. The EtOAc solution is washed with 0.5N 0° C. HCl, brine, dried and evaporated. The residue is chromatographed on silica gel using 15% to 20% EtOAc in hexane as eluent to afford the methyl ester intermediate.
The methyl ester intermediate is then diluted with THF and water, LiOH.H2O is added and the resulting mixture is stirred at room temperature for 25 hours, wherein the completion of the hydrolysis is monitored by TLC. The reaction mixture is concentrated under vacuum to remove a majority of the THF and further diluted with methylene chloride. The resulting solution is washed with 1 N HCl, dried with anhydrous Na2SO4 and concentrated under vacuum. To remove minor impurities and excess Boc2O, the crude product is purified via flash chromatography using a solvent gradient from 100% hexane →100% EtOAc as the eluent. (2S)—N-Boc-amino-5-oxo-non-8-enoic acid 71d is obtained. For further details of the preceding amino acid synthesis may be found in T. Tsuda et al., J. Am. Chem. Soc., 1980, 102, 6381-6384 and WO 00/59929.
71C. Synthesis of Modified Cyclic Peptide Precursor Mesylate
The modified cyclic peptide precursor mesylate is prepared using the synthetic route detailed in Example 1 using (2S)—N-Boc-amino-5-oxo-non-8-enoic acid 71d in place of Boc-L-2-amino-8-nonenoic acid 1a followed by conversion to the corresponding mesylate via the method described in Example 2.
The title compound is prepared with the modified cyclic peptide precursor mesylate formed in 71C and 3-(thiophen-2-yl)-1H-quinoxylin-2-one by the Mitsunobu conditions elucidated in Example 2 followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the method set forth in Example 2.
Example 72
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=—CH(CH3)CH2—, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen.
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00203
Synthesis of (2S,5R)—N-Boc-2-amino-5-methyl-non-8-enoic acid (72h)
72A. To solid ethyl 2-acetamidomalonate 72b is added (R)-(+)-citronellal 72a in a solution of pyridine over 1 min. The resulting solution is cooled in a 10° C. bath and acetic anhydride is added over 4 min. The resulting solution is stirred for 3 hours at room temperature and another portion of ethyl 2-acetamidomalonate 72a is added. The resulting mixture is stirred at room temperature for an additional 11 hours. Ice is then added and the solution is stirred for 1.5 hours, then the mixture is diluted with 250 ml water and extracted with two portions of ether. The organic phase is washed with 1N HCl, sat. NaHCO3, dried Na2SO4, concentrated and purified by flash chromatography (40% EtOAc/hexane) to afford compound 72c.
72B. To a degassed solution of 72c in dry ethanol is added (S,S)-Et-DUPHOS Rh(COD)OTf. The mixture is subjected to 30 psi of hydrogen and stirred on a Parr shaker for 2 hours. The resulting mixture is evaporated to dryness to obtain the crude compound 72d, which is used in the subsequent step without purification.
72C. Compound 72d is dissolved in a mixture of tBuOH/acetone/H2O (1:1:1) and placed in an ice bath (0° C.). NMMO and O5O4 is consecutively added and the reaction mixture is stirred at room temperature for 4 hours. A majority of the acetone is removed by evaporation under vacuum and then the mixture is extracted with ethyl acetate. The organic layer is further washed with water and brine, dried over anhydrous MgSO4 and evaporated to dryness. The diol 72e is obtained in high purity after flash column chromatography using 1% ethanol in ethyl acetate as the eluent.
72D. To a solution of diol 72e in THF/H2O (1:1) at 0° C., NaIO4 is added and the reaction mixture is stirred at room temperature for 3.5 hours. A majority of the THF solvent is subsequently removed by evaporation under vacuum and the remaining mixture is extracted with EtOAc. The combined organic layers are further washed with 5% aqueous citric acid solution, 5% aq. NaHCO3 and brine, then the organic phase is dried over MgSO4 and evaporated to dryness under vacuum. Aldehyde intermediate 72f is used in the following step in its crude form.
72E. To a solution of Ph3PCH3Br in anhydrous toluene, KHMDS is added forming a suspension which is stirred at room temperature for 30 min. under N2. After stirring, the suspension is cooled to 0° C., a solution of aldehyde intermediate 72f in THF is added, the mixture is warmed to room temperature, and stirred for 1 hour. A majority of the THF is evaporated under vacuum, EtOAc is added to the mixture and the organic phase is washed with water, 5% aq. NaHCO3 and brine. The organic phase is then dried over MgSO4 and evaporated to dryness under vacuum. Pure compound 72g is isolated after purification via flash chromatography on silica gel, using hexane:EtOAc (3:2) as the eluent.
72F. To a solution of crude 72g in THF, Boc2O, and DMAP is added and the reaction mixture is heated to reflux for 2.5 hours. Subsequently, a majority of the THF is evaporated, the crude mixture is diluted with methylene chloride and washed with 1N HCl to remove DMAP. The organic layer is further extracted with saturated aq. NaHCO3, dried with anyhrous Na2SO4 and concentrated under vacuum. The crude product is then diluted with THF and water, LiOH.H2O is added and the resulting mixture is stirred at room temperature for 25 hours, wherein the completion of the hydrolysis is monitored by TLC. The reaction mixture is concentrated under vacuum to remove a majority of the THF and further diluted with methylene chloride. The resulting solution is washed with 1N HCl, dried with anhydrous Na2SO4 and concentrated under vacuum. To remove minor impurities and excess Boc2O, the crude product is purified via flash chromatography using a solvent gradient from 100% hexane →100% EtOAc as the eluent. (2S, 5R)—N-Boc-2-amino-5-methyl-non-8-enoic acid 72 h is obtained. For further details of the preceding amino acid synthesis see WO 00/59929.
Synthesis of Modified Cyclic Peptide Precursor Mesylate
The modified cyclic peptide precursor mesylate is prepared using the synthetic route detailed in Example 1 using ((2S, 5R)—N-Boc-2-amino-5-methyl-non-8-enoic acid 72h in place of Boc-L-2-amino-8-nonenoic acid 1a followed by conversion to the corresponding mesylate via the method described in Example 2.
The title compound is prepared with the modified cyclic peptide precursor mesylate formed in 72G and 3-(thiophen-2-yl)-1H-quinoxylin-2-one by the Mitsunobu conditions elucidated in Example 2 followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the method set forth in Example 2.
Example 73
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=—O—, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, R5=methyl, and R6=hydrogen.
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00204
Synthesis of N-Boc-O-allyl-(L)-threonine (73d)
73A. Boc-(L)-threonine 73a is partially dissolved in methylene chloride/methanol at 0° C. A solution of diazomethane in diethyl ether is added until yellow, indicating the presence of diazomethane. Upon evaporation of the solvents, crude methyl ester 73b is obtained.
73B. Intermediate 73b is dissolved in anhydrous diethyl ether, Ag2O is added and freshly activated 4 Å molecular sieves. Finally, allyl iodide is added to the reaction mixture and is stirred at reflux. Two additional portions of allyl iodide are added to the reaction mixture after a period of 20 hours and 30 hours and stirring is continued for a total of 36 hours. The mixture is then filtered through celite and purified by flash chromatography on silica gel, using EtOAc/hexane (1:4) as the eluent, to afford compound 73c.
73C. Compound 73c is dissolved in a mixture of THF/MeOH/H2O (2:1:1) and LiOH.H2O is added. The solution is stirred at room temperature for 2 hours, and is acidified with 1 N HCl to pH ˜3 before the solvents are removed under vacuum. The resulting crude compound 73d is obtained. For further details of the preceding synthesis see WO 00/59929, which is herein incorporated by reference in its entirety.
73D. Synthesis of Modified Cyclic Peptide Precursor Mesylate
The modified cyclic peptide precursor mesylate is prepared using the synthetic route detailed in Example 1 using N-Boc-O-allyl-(L)-threonine 73d in place of Boc-L-2-amino-8-nonenoic acid 1a followed by conversion to the corresponding mesylate via the method described in Example 2.
The title compound is prepared with the modified cyclic peptide precursor mesylate formed in 73D and 3-(thiophen-2-yl)-1H-quinoxylin-2-one by the Mitsunobu conditions elucidated in Example 2 followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the method set forth in Example 2.
Example 74
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=—S—, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, R5=methyl, and R6=hydrogen.
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00205
Synthesis of (2S, 3S)—N-Boc-2 amino-3(mercaptoallyl)butanoic acid (74e)
74A. Compound 74a is dissolved in pyridine and the solution is cooled to 0° C. in an ice bath, tosyl chloride is added in small portions and the reaction mixture is partitioned between diethyl ether and H2O. The ether layer is further washed with 0.2 N HCl and brine, dried over anhydrous MgSO4, filtered and concentrated to dryness under vacuum. Purification of the crude material by flash chromatography on silica gel, using hexane/EtOAc (gradient from 8:2 to 7:3 ratio) as the eluent, leads to isolation of tosyl derivative 74b.
74B. To a solution of tosyl derivative 74b in anhydrous DMF, potassium thioacetate is added and the reaction mixture is stirred at room temperature for 24 hours. A majority of the DMF is then evaporated under vacuum and the remaining mixture is partitioned between EtOAc and H2O. The aqueous layer is re-extracted with EtOAc, the combined organic layers are washed with brine, dried over anhydrous MgSO4 and evaporated to dryness. Purification of the crude material by flash chromatography on silica gel using hexane/EtOAc (4:1 ratio) as the eluent, affords thioester 74c.
74C. To a solution of thioester 74c is H2O/EtOH (3:5 ratio) and aqueous solution of 0.2M NaOH is added and the mixture is stirred at room temperature for 1.5 hours. Allyl iodide is then added and stirring is continued at room temperature for an additional 30 min. The reaction mixture is concentrated to half of its original volume and then extracted with EtOAc. The aqueous layer is acidified to pH ˜3 with cold, aqueous 0.5N HCl and re-extracted with EtOAc. The combined organic layers are washed with brine, dried over anhydrous MgSO4 and evaporated to dryness under vacuum. The crude reaction mixture contains at least four products; all of the products are isolated after flash chromatography on silica gel, using hexane/EtOAc (gradient from 9:1 to 3:1). The desired product 74d is the least polar compound.
74D. A solution of compound 74d in MeOH/H2O (3:1) is mixed with aqueous NaOH (0.3 N) for 24 hours at room temperature and for 1 hour at 40° C. The reaction mixture is acidified with cold aqueous 0.5 N HCl, the MeOH is removed under vacuum and the remaining aqueous mixture is extracted with EtOAc. The organic phase is dried over MgSO4 and evaporated to dryness in order to obtain compound 74e. For further details of the synthesis of amino acid 74e, see WO 00/59929, which is herein incorporated by reference in its entirety.
74E. Synthesis of Modified Cyclic Peptide Precursor Mesylate
The modified cyclic peptide precursor mesylate is prepared using the synthetic route detailed in Example 1 using (2S, 3S)—N-Boc-2 amino-3(mercaptoallyl)butanoic acid 74e in place of Boc-L-2-amino-8-nonenoic acid 1a followed by conversion to the corresponding mesylate via the method described in Example 2.
The title compound is prepared with the modified cyclic peptide precursor mesylate formed in 74E and 3-(thiophen-2-yl)-1H-quinoxylin-2-one by the Mitsunobu conditions elucidated in Example 2 followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the method set forth in Example 2.
Example 75
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=—S(O)—, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, R5=methyl, and R6=hydrogen.
Formation of Modified Amino Acid
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00206
75A. The modified amino acid is prepared by dissolving sodium metaperiodate (1.1 eq.) in water and cooled to 0° C. in an ice bath followed by adding dropwise a solution of compound 75d in dioxane. The resulting reaction mixture is stirred for one hour at 0° C. and 4 hours at 40° C. The reaction mixture is concentrated, water is added, and the mixture is extracted with methylene chloride twice. The combined organic layers are washed with water, brine, dried with anhydrous MgSO4 and concentrated in vacuo. The methyl ester is then reduced via the method set forth in Example 74D to arrive upon the modified amino acid 75a. For further details concerning the sulfur oxidation reaction, see S. A. Burrage et al., Tett. Lett., 1998, 39, 2831-2834, which is herein incorporated by reference in its entirety.
75B. Synthesis of Modified Cyclic Peptide Precursor Mesylate
The modified cyclic peptide precursor mesylate is prepared using the synthetic route detailed in Example 1 using the modified amino acid 75a in place of Boc-L-2-amino-8-nonenoic acid 1a followed by conversion to the corresponding mesylate via the method described in Example 2.
The title compound is prepared with the modified cyclic peptide precursor mesylate formed in 75B and 3-(thiophen-2-yl)-1H-quinoxylin-2-one by the Mitsunobu conditions elucidated in Example 2 followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the method set forth in Example 2.
Example 76
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=—S(O)2, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, R5=methyl, and R6=hydrogen.
Formation of Modified Amino Acid
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00207
76A. The modified amino acid is prepared by dissolving sodium metaperiodate (1.1 eq.) in water and cooled to 0° C. in an ice bath followed by adding dropwise a solution of compound 76d in dioxane. The resulting reaction mixture is stirred for one hour at 0° C. and 4 hours at 40° C. The reaction mixture is concentrated, water is added, and the mixture is extracted with methylene chloride twice. The combined organic layers are washed with water, brine, dried with anhydrous MgSO4 and concentrated in vacuo. The methyl ester is then reduced via the method set forth in Example 74D to arrive upon the modified amino acid 76a. For further details concerning the sulfur oxidation reaction, see S. A. Burrage et al., Tett. Lett., 1998, 39, 2831-2834.
76B. Synthesis of Modified Cyclic Peptide Precursor Mesylate
The modified cyclic peptide precursor mesylate is prepared using the synthetic route detailed in Example 1 using the modified amino acid 76a in place of Boc-L-2-amino-8-nonenoic acid 1a followed by conversion to the corresponding mesylate via the method described in Example 2.
The title compound is prepared with the modified cyclic peptide precursor mesylate formed in 76B and 3-(thiophen-2-yl)-1H-quinoxylin-2-one by the Mitsunobu conditions elucidated in Example 2 followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the method set forth in Example 2.
Example 77
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=—SCH2CH2—, X=Y=thiophen-3-yl, Z=hydrogen, j=0, m=s=1, and R5=R6=CH3
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00208
77A. Synthesis of (S)—N-Boc-2-amino-3-methyl-3(1-mercapto-4-butenyl)butanoic acid (77b)
L-Penicillamine 77a is dissolved in DMF/DMSO (5:1), subsequently, 4-bromopentene and CsOH.H2O are added to the mixture and stirring is continued for an additional 12 hours. The DMF is subsequently removed in vacuo, the remaining mixture is diluted with 0.5 N HCl (at 0° C.) to adjust the pH to ˜4-5 and then extracted with 2 portions of EtOAc. The organic phase is washed with brine (2×), dried over MgSO4 and evaporated to dryness to afford the crude carboxylic acid 77a.
77B. Synthesis of Modified Cyclic Peptide Precursor Mesylate
The Modified Cyclic peptide precursor mesylate is prepared using the synthetic route detailed in Example 1 using the modified amino acid 77a in place of Boc-L-2-amino-8-nonenoic acid 1a followed by conversion to the corresponding mesylate via the method described in Example 2.
The title compound is prepared with the modified cyclic peptide precursor mesylate formed in 77B and 3-(thiophen-2-yl)-1H-quinoxylin-2-one by the Mitsunobu conditions elucidated in Example 2 followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the method set forth in Example 2.
Example 78
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=CF2CH2, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen.
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00209
Synthesis of (2S)—N-Boc-amino-5-difluoro-non-8-enoic acid (78b)
78A. To a solution of the ketone compound 71d (0.30 g, 1 mmol) in 5 ml DCM, DAST (Diethylaminosulfurtrifluoride, 0.2 g, 1.2 eq) is added. The reaction is kept at room temperature over a period of 2-3 days. The solvent is evaporated and the residue is purified by silica gel flash chromatography using different ratios of hexanes:EtOAc as eluent (9:1→5:1→3:1→1:1), providing the isolated methyl ester 78a. For further details concerning the preceding synthesis, see Tius, Marcus A et al., Tetrahedron, 1993, 49, 16; 3291-3304, which is herein incorporated by reference in its entirety.
78B. Methyl ester 78a is dissolved in THF/MeOH/H2O (2:1:1) and LiOH.H2O is added. The solution is stirred at room temperature for 2 hours, and is then acidified with 1N HCl to pH ˜3 before the solvents are removed in vacuo to afford the crude (2S)—N-Boc-amino-5-difluoro-non-8-enoic acid 78b.
78C. Synthesis of Modified Cyclic Peptide. Precursor Mesylate
The modified cyclic peptide precursor mesylate is prepared using the synthetic route detailed in Example 1 using crude (2S)—N-Boc-amino-5-difluoro-non-8-enoic acid 78b in place of Boc-L-2-amino-8-nonenoic acid 1a followed by conversion to the corresponding mesylate via the method described in Example 2.
The title compound is prepared with the modified cyclic peptide precursor mesylate formed in 78C and 3-(thiophen-2-yl)-1H-quinoxylin-2-one by the Mitsunobu conditions elucidated in Example 2 followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the method set forth in Example 2.
Example 79
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=—CHFCH2—, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1 and R5=R6=hydrogen.
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00210
Synthesis of (2S)—N-Boc-amino-5-fluoro-non-8-enoic acid (79c)
79A. To a solution of the ketone compound 71d in 5 ml methanol, NaBH4 (2.2 eq) is added. The reaction mixture is stirred at room temperature over a period of 2-6 hours, and then quenched by 1M ammonium chloride and extracted with EtOAc (30 ml). The solvent is evaporated and the crude hydroxy compound 79a is obtained.
79B. The hydroxy compound 79a is dissolved in 5 ml DCM to which DAST (0.2 g, 1.2 eq) is added and stirred at −45° C. for 1 hour. The reaction mixture is then warmed to room temperature and stirred over a period of 2-3 days. The solvent is evaporated and the residue is purified by silica gel flash chromatography using different ratios of hexanes:EtOAc as eluent (9:1→5:1→3:1→1:1), providing the isolated monofluoro compound methyl ester 79b. For further details concerning the preceding reaction, see Buist, Peter H et al., Tetrahedron Lett., 1987, 28, 3891-3894, which is herein incorporated by reference in its entirety.
79C. Methyl ester 79b is dissolved in THF/MeOH/H2O (2:1:1) and LiOH.H2O is added. The solution is stirred at room temperature for 2 hours, and is then acidified with 1N HCl to pH ˜3 before the solvents are removed in vacuo to afford the crude (2S)—N-Boc-amino-5-difluoro-non-8-enoic acid 79c.
79D. Synthesis of Modified Cyclic Peptide Precursor Mesylate
The modified cyclic peptide precursor mesylate is prepared using the synthetic route detailed in Example 1 using crude (2S)—N-Boc-amino-5-monofluoro-non-8-enoic acid 79b in place of Boc-L-2-amino-8-nonenoic acid 1a followed by conversion to the corresponding mesylate via the method described in Example 2.
The title compound is prepared with the modified cyclic peptide precursor mesylate formed in 79C and 3-(thiophen-2-yl)-1H-quinoxylin-2-one by the Mitsunobu conditions elucidated in Example 2 followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the method set forth in Example 2.
Example 80
Compound of Formula II, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen.
80A. The saturated cyclic peptide precursor is prepared by catalytic reduction of the cyclic peptide precursor of Example 1 with Pd/C in MeOH in the presence of H2.
The title compound is prepared with the saturated cyclic peptide precursor mesylate formed in 80A and 3-(thiophen-2-yl)-1H-quinoxylin-2-one by the Mitsunobu conditions elucidated in Example 2 followed by hydrolysis of the ethyl ester via the method set forth in Example 2.
The compounds of the present invention exhibit potent inhibitory properties against the HCV NS3 protease. The following examples elucidate assays in which the compounds of the present invention are tested for anti-HCV effects.
Example 81 NS3/NS4a Protease Enzyme Assay
HCV protease activity and inhibition is assayed using an internally quenched fluorogenic substrate. A DABCYL and an EDANS group are attached to opposite ends of a short peptide. Quenching of the EDANS fluorescence by the DABCYL group is relieved upon proteolytic cleavage. Fluorescence was measured with a Molecular Devices Fluoromax (or equivalent) using an excitation wavelength of 355 nm and an emission wavelength of 485 nm.
The assay is run in Corning white half-area 96-well plates (VWR 29444-312 [Corning 3693]) with full-length NS3 HCV protease 1b tethered with NS4A cofactor (final enzyme concentration 1 to 15 nM). The assay buffer is complemented with 10 μM NS4A cofactor Pep 4A (Anaspec 25336 or in-house, MW 1424.8). RET S1 (Ac-Asp-Glu-Asp (EDANS)-Glu-Glu-Abu-[COO]Ala-Ser-Lys-(DABCYL)-NH2, AnaSpec 22991, MW 1548.6) is used as the fluorogenic peptide substrate. The assay buffer contained 50 mM Hepes at pH 7.5, 30 mM NaCl and 10 mM BME. The enzyme reaction is followed over a 30 minutes time course at room temperature in the absence and presence of inhibitors.
The peptide inhibitors HCV Inh 1 (Anaspec 25345, MW 796.8) Ac-Asp-Glu-Met-Glu-Glu-Cys-OH, [−20° C.] and HCV Inh 2 (Anaspec 25346, MW 913.1) Ac-Asp-Glu-Dif-Cha-Cys-OH, were used as reference compounds.
IC50 values were calculated using XLFit in ActivityBase (IDBS) using equation 205: y=A+((B−A)/(1+((C/x)+D))).
Example 82 Cell-Based Replicon Assay
Quantification of HCV Replicon RNA in Cell Lines (HCV Cell Based Assay)
Cell lines, including Huh-11-7 or Huh 9-13, harboring HCV replicons (Lohmann, et al Science 285:110-113, 1999) are seeded at 5×103 cells/well in 96 well plates and fed media containing DMEM (high glucose), 10% fetal calf serum, penicillin-streptomycin and non-essential amino acids. Cells are incubated in a 5% CO2 incubator at 37° C. At the end of the incubation period, total RNA is extracted and purified from cells using Qiagen Rneasy 96 Kit (Catalog No. 74182). To amplify the HCV RNA so that sufficient material can be detected by an HCV specific probe (below), primers specific for HCV (below) mediate both the reverse transcription of the HCV RNA and the amplification of the cDNA by polymerase chain reaction (PCR) using the Taq-Man One-Step RT-PCR Master Mix Kit (Applied Biosystems catalog no. 4309169). The nucleotide sequences of the RT-PCR primers, which are located in the NS5B region of the HCV genome, are the following:
HCV Forward primer “RBNS5bfor”
5′GCTGCGGCCTGTCGAGCT:
HCV Reverse primer “RBNS5Brev”:
5′CAAGGTCGTCTCCGCATAC
Detection of the RT-PCR product was accomplished using the Applied Biosystems (ABI) Prism 7700 Sequence Detection System (SDS) that detects the fluorescence that is emitted when the probe, which is labeled with a fluorescence reporter dye and a quencher dye, is processed during the PCR reaction. The increase in the amount of fluorescence is measured during each cycle of PCR and reflects the increasing amount of RT-PCR product. Specifically, quantification is based on the threshold cycle, where the amplification plot crosses a defined fluorescence threshold. Comparison of the threshold cycles of the sample with a known standard provides a highly sensitive measure of relative template concentration in different samples (ABI User Bulletin #2 Dec. 11, 1997). The data is analyzed using the ABI SDS program version 1.7. The relative template concentration can be converted to RNA copy numbers by employing a standard curve of HCV RNA standards with known copy number (ABI User Bulletin #2 Dec. 11, 1997). The RT-PCR product was detected using the following labeled probe:
5′ FAM-CGAAGCTCCAGGACTGCACGATGCT-TAMRA
    • FAM=Fluorescence reporter dye.
    • TAMRA:=Quencher dye.
The RT reaction is performed at 48° C. for 30 minutes followed by PCR. Thermal cycler parameters used for the PCR reaction on the ABI Prism 7700 Sequence Detection System were: one cycle at 95° C., 10 minutes followed by 35 cycles each of which included one incubation at 95° C. for 15 seconds and a second incubation for 60° C. for 1 minute.
To normalize the data to an internal control molecule within the cellular RNA, RT-PCR is performed on the cellular messenger RNA glyceraldehydes-3-phosphate dehydrogenase (GAPDH). The GAPDH copy number is very stable in the cell lines used. GAPDH RT-PCR is performed on the same exact RNA sample from which the HCV copy number is determined. The GAPDH primers and probes, as well as the standards with which to determine copy number, are contained in the ABI Pre-Developed TaqMan Assay Kit (catalog no. 431 0884E). The ratio of HCV/GAPDH RNA is used to calculate the activity of compounds evaluated for inhibition of HCV RNA replication.
Activity of Compounds as Inhibitors of HCV Replication (Cell Based Assay) in Replicon Containing Huh-7 Cell Lines
The effect of a specific anti-viral compound on HCV replicon RNA levels in Huh-11-7 or 9-13 cells was determined by comparing the amount of HCV RNA normalized to GAPDH (e.g. the ratio of HCV/GAPDH) in the cells exposed to compound versus cells exposed to the 0% inhibition and the 100% inhibition controls. Specifically, cells were seeded at 5×103 cells/well in a 96 well plate and were incubated either with: 1) media containing 1% DMSO (0% inhibition control), 2) 100 international units, IU/ml Interferon-alpha 2b in media/1% DMSO or 3) media/1% DMSO containing a fixed concentration of compound. 96 well plates as described above were then incubated at 37° C. for 3 days (primary screening assay) or 4 days (IC50 determination). Percent inhibition was defined as:
% Inhibition=[100−((S—C2)/C1−C2))]×100
    • where
    • S=the ratio of HCV RNA copy number/GAPDH RNA copy number in the sample;
    • C1=the ratio of HCV RNA copy number/GAPDH RNA copy number in the 0% inhibition control (media/1% DMSO); and
    • C2=the ratio of HCV RNA copy number/GAPDH RNA copy number in the 100% inhibition control (100 IU/ml Interferon-alpha 2b).
The dose-response curve of the inhibitor was generated by adding compound in serial, three-fold dilutions over three logs to wells starting with the highest concentration of a specific compound at 10 uM and ending with the lowest concentration of 0.01 uM. Further dilution series (1 uM to 0.001 uM for example) was performed if the IC50 value was not in the linear range of the curve. IC50 was determined based on the IDBS Activity Base program using Microsoft Excel “XL Fit” in which A=100% inhibition value (100 IU/ml Interferon-alpha 2b), B=0% inhibition control value (media/1% DMSO) and C=midpoint of the curve as defined as C=(B−A/2)+A. A, B and C values are expressed as the ratio of HCV RNA/GAPDH RNA as determined for each sample in each well of a 96 well plate as described above. For each plate the average of 4 wells were used to define the 100% and 0% inhibition values.
Although the invention has been described with respect to various preferred embodiments, it is not intended to be limited thereto, but rather those skilled in the art will recognize that variations and modifications may be made therein which are within the spirit of the invention and the scope of the appended claims.

Claims (14)

1. A compound of Formula I or II:
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00211
wherein
A is independently selected from hydrogen; , —(C═O)—O—R1, —(C═O)—R2, —C(═O)—NH—R2, —C(═S)—NH—R2, or and —S(O)2—R2;
G is independently selected from —OH, —O—(C1-C12 alkyl), —NHS(O)2—R1, —(C═O)—R2, —(C═O)—O—R1, or and —(C═O)—NH—R2;
L is absent or independently selected from —S—, —SCH2—, —SCH2CH2—, —S(O)2—, —S(O)2CH2CH2—, —S(O)—, —S(O)CH2CH2—, —O—, —OCH2—, —OCH2CH2—, —(C═O)—CH2—, —CH(CH3)CH2—, —CFHCH2—, or and —CF2CH2—;
X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached form a cyclic moiety selected from aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, or and substituted heteroaryl;
W is absent, or independently selected from —O—, —S—, —NH—, —C(O)NR1— or and —NR1—;
Z is independently selected from hydrogen; , —CN, —SCN, —NCO, —NCS, —NHNH2, —N3, halogen, —R4, —C3-C12 cycloalkyl, substituted —C3-C12 cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocycloalkyl, substituted heterocycloalkyl, and —NH—N═CH(R1);
each R1 is independently selected from hydrogen, C1-C6 alkyl, substituted C1-C6 alkyl, C1-C6 alkenyl, substituted C1-C6 alkenyl, C1-C6 alkynyl, substituted C1-C6 alkynyl, C3-C12 cycloalkyl, substituted C3-C12 cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, or and substituted heterocycloalkyl;
each R2 is independently selected from hydrogen, C1-C6 alkyl, C1-C6 alkyl, substituted C1-C6 alkyl, C1-C6 alkenyl, substituted C1-C6 alkenyl, C1-C6 alkynyl, substituted C1-C6 alkynyl, C3-C12 cycloalkyl, substituted C3-C12 cycloalkyl, alkylamino, dialkylamino, arylamino, diarylamino, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, or and substituted heterocycloalkyl;
each R4 is independently selected from:
(i) —C1-C6 alkyl containing 0, 1, 2, or 3 heteroatoms selected from O, S, or and N, optionally substituted with one or more substituent selected from halogen, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, or and substituted heteroaryl;
(ii) —C2-C6 alkenyl containing 0, 1, 2, or 3 heteroatoms selected from O, S, or and N, optionally substituted with one or more substituent selected from halogen, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, or and substituted heteroaryl; or and
(iii) —C2-C6 alkynyl containing 0, 1, 2, or 3 heteroatoms selected from O, S, or and N, optionally substituted with one or more substituent selected from halogen, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, or and substituted heteroaryl;
R5 and R6 are each independently selected from hydrogen or and methyl;
each R7 and R8 is independently selected from:
(i) —C1-C6 alkyl containing 0, 1, 2, or 3 heteroatoms selected from O, S, or N, optionally substituted with one or more substituent selected from halogen, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, or substituted heteroaryl;
(ii) —C2-C6 alkenyl containing 0, 1, 2, or 3 heteroatoms selected from O, S, or N, optionally substituted with one or more substituent selected from halogen, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, or substituted heteroaryl; or
(iii) —C2-C6 alkynyl containing 0, 1, 2, or 3 heteroatoms selected from O, S, or N, optionally substituted with one or more substituent selected from halogen, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, or substituted heteroaryl;
j=0, 1, 2, 3, or 4;
m=0, 1, or 2; and
s=0, 1 or 2;
wherein each substituted alkyl, substituted alkynyl alkenyl, substituted alkynyl, substituted aryl, substituted arylalkyl, substituted heteroaryl, substituted C3-C12-cycloalkyl, substituted heterocycloalkyl, and substituted heteroarylalkyl may independently replace one, two or three of the hydrogen atoms thereon with F, Cl, Br, I, OH, NO2, CN, C1-C6-alkyl-OH, C(O)—C1-C6-alkyl, OCH2—C3-C12-cycloalkyl, C(O)H, C(O)-aryl, C(O)-heteroaryl, CO2-alkyl, CO2-aryl, CO2-heteroaryl, CONH2, CONH—C1-C6-alkyl, CONH-aryl, CONH-heteroaryl, OC(O)—C1-C6-alkyl, OC(O)-aryl, OC(O)-heteroaryl, OCO2-alkyl, OCO2-aryl, OCO2-heteroaryl, OCONH2, OCONH—C1-C6-alkyl, OCONH-aryl, OCONH-heteroaryl, NHC(O)H, NHC(O)—C1-C6-alkyl, NHC(O)-aryl, NHC(O)-heteroaxyl NHC(O)-heteroaryl, NHCO2-alkyl, NHCO2-aryl, NHCO2-heteroaryl, NHCONH2, NHCONH—C1-C6-alkyl, NHCONH-aryl, NHCONH-heteroaryl, SO2—C1-C6-alkyl, SO2-aryl, SO2-heteroaryl, SO2NH2, SO2NH—C1-C6-alkyl, SO2NH-aryl, SO2NH-heteroaryl, C1-C6-alkyl, C3-C12-cycloalkyl, CF3, CH2CF3, CHCl2, CH2NH2, CH2SO2CH3, C1-C6 alkyl, halo alkyl, C3-C12 cycloalkyl, substituted C3-C12 cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, benzyl, benzyloxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, C1-C6-alkoxy, methoxymethoxy, methoxyethoxy, amino, benzylamino, arylamino, heteroarylamino, C1-C3-alkylamino, di-C1-C3-alkylamino, thio, aryl-thio, heteroarylthio, benzyl-thio, C1-C6-alkyl-thio, or methylthiomethyl.
2. The compound of claim 1, wherein the compound is of Formula III:
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00212
wherein R7 and R8 are independently selected from R4 as defined in claim 1.
3. The compound of claim 1, wherein the compound is of Formula IV:
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00213
wherein R7 and R8 are independently selected from R4 as defined in claim 1.
4. A compound according to any one of claims 1-3, wherein W is absent and Z is thiophenyl.
5. A compound according to any one of claims 1-3, wherein W is —CH═CH— and Z is thiophenyl.
6. A compound according to claim 1 which is selected from:
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=2-(formamido)-thiazol-4-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=ethyl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=phenyl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=4-methoxyphenyl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=4-ethoxyphenyl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=5-bromothiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=2-pyrid-3-yl ethylenyl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=3,4-Dimethoxy-phenyl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=2-thiophen-2-yl ethylenyl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, Z=indole-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=1H-indol-3-yl methyl 1H-indol- 3 -ylmethyl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=furan-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=1H-benzoimidazol-2-yl 1H-benzoimidazol- 2 -yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z =1H-imidazol-2-ylmethyl 1H-imidazol- 2 -ylmethyl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OEt, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=chloro, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, Z=thiophen-3-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=2-pyrid-3-yl acetylenyl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=2,3-dihydrobenzofuran-5-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W=—NH—, Z=propargyl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W=—N(ethyl)-, Z=benzyl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W=—NH—, Z=pyrid-3-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=tetrazolyl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=morpholino, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W=—O—, Z=thiophen-3-yl-methyl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00214
W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00215
W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00216
W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00217
W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00218
W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00219
W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00220
W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00221
W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00222
W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00223
W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00224
W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00225
W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00226
W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00227
W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00228
W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00229
W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00230
W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00231
W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00232
W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00233
W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00234
W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00235
W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OEt, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00236
W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00237
W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00238
W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00239
W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, R5=R6=hydrogen;
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00240
W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, R5=R6=hydrogen;
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=—(C═O)—O—R1, wherein R1=cyclopentyl, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=—(C═O)—O—R1, wherein R1=cyclobutyl, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=—(C═O)—O—R1, wherein R1=cyclohexyl, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=—(C═O)—O—R1, wherein R1=
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00241
G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=—(C═O)—O—R1, wherein R1=
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00242
G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=—(C═O)—O—R1, wherein R1=
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00243
G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=—(C═O)—R1, wherein R1=cyclopentyl, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=—(C═O)—NH—R1, wherein R1=cyclopentyl, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=—(C=S)—NH—R1, wherein R1=cyclopentyl, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=—S(O)2—R1, wherein R1=cyclopentyl, G=OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=—(C═O)—O—R1, R1=cyclopentyl, G=—O-phenethyl, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=—(C═O)—O—R1, R1=cyclopentyl, G=—NH-phenethyl, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=—(C═O)—O—R1, R1=cyclopentyl, G=—NHS(O)2-phenethyl L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=—(C═O)—O—R1, R1=cyclopentyl, G=—(C═O)—OH, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=—(C═O)—O—R1, R1=cyclopentyl, G=—(C═O)—O-phenethyl, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=—(C═O)—O—R1, R1=cyclopentyl, G=—(C═O)—NH-phenethyl, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=—(C═O)—O—R1, R1=cyclopentyl, G=—(C═O)—NH—S(O)2-benzyl, L=absent, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=—(C═O)CH2—, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=—CH(CH3)CH2—, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen;
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=—O—, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, R5=methyl, and R6=hydrogen;
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=—S—, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, R5=methyl, and R6=hydrogen;
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=—S(O)—, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, R5=methyl, and R6=hydrogen;
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=—S(O)2, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, R5=methyl, and R6=hydrogen;
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=—SCH2CH2—, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, R5=methyl, and R6=hydrogen;
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=CF2CH2, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen; and
Compound of Formula I, wherein A=tBOC, G=OH, L=—CHFCH2—, X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached are phenyl, W is absent, Z=thiophen-2-yl, j=3, m=s=1, and R5=R6=hydrogen.
7. A compound of Formula V:
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00244
wherein A is selected from:
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00245
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00246
and B is selected from:
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00247
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00248
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00249
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00250
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00251
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00252
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00253
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00254
8. A compound of claim 7 selected from the following compounds:
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00255
Compound B Compound B 101301
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00256
101358
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00257
101306
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00258
101302
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00259
101322
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00260
101311
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00261
101325
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00262
101303
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00263
101326
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00264
101327
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00265
101330
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00266
101331
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00267
101332
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00268
101335
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00269
101336
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00270
101348
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00271
101340
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00272
101334
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00273
101348
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00274
101359
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00275
101328
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00276
101360
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00277
101361
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00278
101362
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00279
101329
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00280
101324
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00281
101304
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00282
101355
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00283
101356
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00284
101307
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00285
101357
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00286
101347
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00287
101352
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00288
101364
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00289
101308
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00290
101309
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00291
101367
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00292
101368
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00293
101323
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00294
101317
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00295
101318
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00296
101319
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00297
101351
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00298
101353
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00299
101349
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00300
101333
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00301
101320
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00302
101321
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00303
101347
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00304
101350
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00305
101313
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00306
101366
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00307
101354
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00308
101343
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00309
101314
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00310
101339
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00311
101341
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00312
101345
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00313
101344
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00314
101342
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00315
101315
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00316
101346
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00317
101337
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00318
101338
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00319
!
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00320
Compound A Compound A 105301
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00321
123301
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00322
112301
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00323
124301
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00324
109301
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00325
122301
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00326
111301
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00327
114301
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00328
107301
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00329
104301
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00330
110301
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00331
128301
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00332
124301
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00333
113301
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00334
143301
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00335
115301
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00336
108301
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00337
118301
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00338
120301
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00339
129301
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00340
121301
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00341
117301
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00342
145301
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00343
106301
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00344
144301
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00345
126301
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00346
127301
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00347
130301
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00348
116301
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00349
102301
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00350
140301
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00351
141301
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00352
139301
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00353
138301
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00354
142301
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00355
137301
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00356
135301
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00357
134301
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00358
133301
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00359
131301
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00360
132301
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00361
136301
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00362
!
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00363
Figure USRE042375-20110517-C00364
9. A pharmaceutical composition comprising an inhibitory amount of a compound according to claim 1 or 7 alone or in combination with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or excipient.
10. A method of treating a hepatitis C viral infection in a subject, comprising administering to the subject an inhibitory amount of a pharmaceutical composition according to claim 9.
11. The compound of claim 1, wherein
L is absent;
X and Y taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached form a cyclic moiety selected from aryl and substituted aryl;
j=3;
m=1;
s=1; and
R 5 and R 6 are hydrogen.
12. The compound of claim 11 wherein W is absent.
13. A pharmaceutical composition comprising an anti-hepatitis C virally effective amount of a compound according to claim 11 , or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester, or prodrug thereof, in combination with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or excipient.
14. A method of treating a hepatitis C viral infection in a subject, comprising administering to the subject an anti-hepatitis C virally effective amount of a pharmaceutical composition according to claim 13 .
US12/069,553 2003-04-18 2008-02-11 Quinoxalinyl macrocyclic hepatitis C serine protease inhibitors Active 2024-05-17 USRE42375E1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US12/069,553 USRE42375E1 (en) 2003-04-18 2008-02-11 Quinoxalinyl macrocyclic hepatitis C serine protease inhibitors

Applications Claiming Priority (3)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US50907103P 2003-04-18 2003-04-18
US10/826,743 US7176208B2 (en) 2003-04-18 2004-04-16 Quinoxalinyl macrocyclic hepatitis C serine protease inhibitors
US12/069,553 USRE42375E1 (en) 2003-04-18 2008-02-11 Quinoxalinyl macrocyclic hepatitis C serine protease inhibitors

Related Parent Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US10/826,743 Reissue US7176208B2 (en) 2003-04-18 2004-04-16 Quinoxalinyl macrocyclic hepatitis C serine protease inhibitors

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
USRE42375E1 true USRE42375E1 (en) 2011-05-17

Family

ID=44741771

Family Applications (5)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US10/826,743 Ceased US7176208B2 (en) 2003-04-18 2004-04-16 Quinoxalinyl macrocyclic hepatitis C serine protease inhibitors
US11/489,011 Active US7368452B2 (en) 2003-04-18 2006-07-18 Quinoxalinyl macrocyclic hepatitis C serine protease inhibitors
US12/069,553 Active 2024-05-17 USRE42375E1 (en) 2003-04-18 2008-02-11 Quinoxalinyl macrocyclic hepatitis C serine protease inhibitors
US12/043,421 Active US7566719B2 (en) 2003-04-18 2008-03-06 Quinoxalinyl macrocyclic hepatitis C serine protease inhibitors
US12/505,725 Active 2025-02-08 US8236807B2 (en) 2003-04-18 2009-07-20 Quinoxalinyl macrocyclic hepatitis C serine protease inhibitors

Family Applications Before (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US10/826,743 Ceased US7176208B2 (en) 2003-04-18 2004-04-16 Quinoxalinyl macrocyclic hepatitis C serine protease inhibitors
US11/489,011 Active US7368452B2 (en) 2003-04-18 2006-07-18 Quinoxalinyl macrocyclic hepatitis C serine protease inhibitors

Family Applications After (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US12/043,421 Active US7566719B2 (en) 2003-04-18 2008-03-06 Quinoxalinyl macrocyclic hepatitis C serine protease inhibitors
US12/505,725 Active 2025-02-08 US8236807B2 (en) 2003-04-18 2009-07-20 Quinoxalinyl macrocyclic hepatitis C serine protease inhibitors

Country Status (1)

Country Link
US (5) US7176208B2 (en)

Cited By (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20080008681A1 (en) * 2006-06-26 2008-01-10 Deqiang Niu Macrocyclic hepatitis c virus serine protease inhibitors
US20090005387A1 (en) * 2007-06-26 2009-01-01 Deqiang Niu Quinoxalinyl macrocyclic hepatitis c virus serine protease inhibitors
US9296782B2 (en) 2012-07-03 2016-03-29 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Inhibitors of hepatitis C virus
US9617310B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2017-04-11 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Inhibitors of hepatitis C virus

Families Citing this family (101)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
ES2487645T3 (en) * 2001-06-21 2014-08-22 Dynavax Technologies Corporation Chimeric immunomodulatory compounds and methods of use thereof
US7176208B2 (en) * 2003-04-18 2007-02-13 Enanta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Quinoxalinyl macrocyclic hepatitis C serine protease inhibitors
US7491794B2 (en) 2003-10-14 2009-02-17 Intermune, Inc. Macrocyclic compounds as inhibitors of viral replication
WO2006039841A1 (en) * 2004-10-14 2006-04-20 Wuxi Pharma Tech Co., Ltd. A NOVEL PROCESS FOR THE PREPARATION OF NONRACEMIC LONG CHAIN α-AMINO ACIDS DERIVATIVES
EP1879607B1 (en) * 2005-05-02 2014-11-12 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. Hcv ns3 protease inhibitors
US7470664B2 (en) * 2005-07-20 2008-12-30 Merck & Co., Inc. HCV NS3 protease inhibitors
GEP20105124B (en) * 2005-07-25 2010-11-25 Array Biopharma Inc Novel macrocyclic inhibitors of hepatitis c virus replication
NZ565269A (en) * 2005-08-01 2010-03-26 Merck & Co Inc Macrocyclic peptides as HCV NS3 protease inhibitors
CA2624333A1 (en) 2005-10-11 2007-04-19 Intermune, Inc. Compounds and methods for inhibiting hepatitis c viral replication
GB0609492D0 (en) * 2006-05-15 2006-06-21 Angeletti P Ist Richerche Bio Therapeutic agents
US9526769B2 (en) * 2006-06-06 2016-12-27 Enanta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Macrocylic oximyl hepatitis C protease inhibitors
US8268776B2 (en) 2006-06-06 2012-09-18 Enanta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Macrocylic oximyl hepatitis C protease inhibitors
GB0612423D0 (en) * 2006-06-23 2006-08-02 Angeletti P Ist Richerche Bio Therapeutic agents
KR20090024834A (en) * 2006-07-05 2009-03-09 인터뮨, 인크. Novel inhibitors of hepatitis c virus replication
NZ574605A (en) 2006-07-13 2011-11-25 Achillion Pharmaceuticals Inc 4-amino-4-oxobutanoyl peptides as inhibitors of viral replication
US7718612B2 (en) * 2007-08-02 2010-05-18 Enanta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Pyridazinonyl macrocyclic hepatitis C serine protease inhibitors
US20090035271A1 (en) * 2007-08-01 2009-02-05 Ying Sun Tetrazolyl macrocyclic hepatitis c serine protease inhibitors
US7635683B2 (en) * 2006-08-04 2009-12-22 Enanta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Quinoxalinyl tripeptide hepatitis C virus inhibitors
CA2656816A1 (en) * 2006-08-04 2008-02-14 Enanta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Tetrazolyl macrocyclic hepatitis c serine protease inhibitors
US7662779B2 (en) * 2006-08-11 2010-02-16 Enanta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Triazolyl macrocyclic hepatitis C serine protease inhibitors
US20090098085A1 (en) * 2006-08-11 2009-04-16 Ying Sun Tetrazolyl acyclic hepatitis c serine protease inhibitors
US7687459B2 (en) * 2006-08-11 2010-03-30 Enanta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Arylalkoxyl hepatitis C virus protease inhibitors
RU2009113664A (en) * 2006-09-13 2010-10-20 Новартис АГ (CH) MACROCYCLIC INHIBITORS OF HCV AND THEIR APPLICATIONS
US8377873B2 (en) * 2006-10-24 2013-02-19 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. HCV NS3 protease inhibitors
JP5345541B2 (en) * 2006-10-24 2013-11-20 メルク・シャープ・アンド・ドーム・コーポレーション HCV NS3 protease inhibitor
CA2667266C (en) * 2006-10-24 2015-11-24 Merck & Co., Inc. Hcv ns3 protease inhibitors
JP5352464B2 (en) * 2006-10-27 2013-11-27 メルク・シャープ・アンド・ドーム・コーポレーション HCV NS3 protease inhibitor
RU2468029C2 (en) 2006-10-27 2012-11-27 Иституто Ди Ричерке Ди Биолоджиа Молеколаре П.Анджелетти С.П.А. Hcv ns3 ptotease inhibitors
JP2010513450A (en) * 2006-12-20 2010-04-30 イステイチユート・デイ・リチエルケ・デイ・ビオロジア・モレコラーレ・ピ・アンジエレツテイ・エツセ・ピー・アー Antiviral indole
GB0625349D0 (en) * 2006-12-20 2007-01-31 Angeletti P Ist Richerche Bio Therapeutic compounds
GB0625345D0 (en) * 2006-12-20 2007-01-31 Angeletti P Ist Richerche Bio Therapeutic compounds
CA2679377A1 (en) * 2007-02-26 2008-09-04 Achillion Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Tertiary amine substituted peptides useful as inhibitors of hcv replication
WO2008134397A1 (en) * 2007-04-26 2008-11-06 Enanta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Aza-tripeptide hepatitis c serine protease inhibitors
US20080267917A1 (en) * 2007-04-26 2008-10-30 Deqiang Niu N-functionalized amides as hepatitis c serine protease inhibitors
US8377872B2 (en) 2007-04-26 2013-02-19 Enanta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Cyclic P3 tripeptide hepatitis C serine protease inhibitors
US20080292587A1 (en) * 2007-04-26 2008-11-27 Ying Sun Oximyl dipeptide hepatitis c protease inhibitors
WO2008134395A1 (en) * 2007-04-26 2008-11-06 Enanta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Aza-peptide macrocyclic hepatitis c serine protease inhibitors
US20090123423A1 (en) * 2007-04-26 2009-05-14 Yonghua Gai Hydroxyamic analogs as hepatitis c virus serine protease inhibitor
US20080286233A1 (en) * 2007-04-26 2008-11-20 Ying Sun Piperizinyl macrocyclic hepatitis c serine protease inhibitors
US20080274082A1 (en) * 2007-04-26 2008-11-06 Yonghua Gai Oximyl hydroxyamic analogs as hepatitis c virus protease inhibitor
US20080279821A1 (en) * 2007-04-26 2008-11-13 Deqiang Niu Arylpiperidinyl and arylpyrrolidinyl macrocyclic hepatitis c serine protease inhibitors
US7910587B2 (en) * 2007-04-26 2011-03-22 Enanta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Quinoxalinyl dipeptide hepatitis C virus inhibitors
US20080317712A1 (en) * 2007-04-26 2008-12-25 Deqiang Niu Arylpiperidinyl and arylpyrrolidinyl tripeptide hepatitis c serine protease inhibitors
US7932277B2 (en) * 2007-05-10 2011-04-26 Intermune, Inc. Peptide inhibitors of hepatitis C virus replication
WO2009010783A1 (en) * 2007-07-17 2009-01-22 Istituto Di Ricerche Di Biologia Molecolare P. Angeletti Spa Macrocyclic indole derivatives for the treatment of hepatitis c infections
WO2009010804A1 (en) * 2007-07-19 2009-01-22 Istituto Di Ricerche Di Biologia Molecolare P. Angeletti S.P.A. Macrocyclic compounds as antiviral agents
WO2009053828A2 (en) * 2007-10-22 2009-04-30 Enanta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. P3 hydroxyamino macrocyclic hepatitis c serine protease inhibitors
US8383583B2 (en) 2007-10-26 2013-02-26 Enanta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Macrocyclic, pyridazinone-containing hepatitis C serine protease inhibitors
CN102026544A (en) 2007-11-14 2011-04-20 益安药业 Macrocyclic tetrazolyl hepatitis c serine protease inhibitors
CL2008003384A1 (en) * 2007-11-14 2009-12-11 Enanta Pharm Inc Macrocyclic quinoxaline derived compounds, serine protease inhibitors; pharmaceutical composition comprising them; and its use in the treatment of hepatitis c.
WO2009070692A1 (en) * 2007-11-29 2009-06-04 Enanta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. C5-substituted, proline-derived, macrocyclic hepatitis c serine protease inhibitors
WO2009070689A1 (en) * 2007-11-29 2009-06-04 Enanta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Bicyclic, c5-substituted proline derivatives as inhibitors of the hepatitis c virus ns3 protease
CN101932242A (en) * 2007-12-05 2010-12-29 益安药业 Quinoxalinyl derivatives
WO2009073713A1 (en) * 2007-12-05 2009-06-11 Enanta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Oximyl macrocyclic derivatives
WO2009073780A1 (en) * 2007-12-06 2009-06-11 Enanta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Process for making macrocyclic oximyl hepatitis c protease inhibitors
WO2009079353A1 (en) * 2007-12-14 2009-06-25 Enanta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Triazole-containing macrocyclic hcv serine protease inhibitors
CN102036966A (en) * 2008-01-24 2011-04-27 益安药业 Difluorinated tripeptides as HCV serine protease inhibitors
JP2011510926A (en) * 2008-01-24 2011-04-07 エナンタ ファーマシューティカルズ インコーポレイテッド Heteroaryl-containing tripeptide HCV serine protease inhibitor
TW200936131A (en) 2008-02-04 2009-09-01 Idenix Pharmaceuticals Inc Macrocyclic serine protease inhibitors
WO2009117594A1 (en) * 2008-03-20 2009-09-24 Enanta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Fluorinated macrocyclic compounds as hepatitis c virus inhibitors
BRPI0911260A2 (en) * 2008-04-15 2015-09-29 Intermune Inc compound, pharmaceutical composition, method of inhibiting ns3 / ns4 protease activity in vitro, and uses of compounds
AU2009241445A1 (en) * 2008-04-28 2009-11-05 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. HCV NS3 protease inhibitors
US8211891B2 (en) * 2008-04-30 2012-07-03 Enanta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Difluoromethyl-containing macrocyclic compounds as hepatitis C virus inhibitors
CN101580535B (en) * 2008-05-16 2012-10-03 太景生物科技股份有限公司 Hcv protease inhibitors
AU2009274190B2 (en) * 2008-07-22 2012-07-05 Msd Italia S.R.L. Macrocyclic quinoxaline compounds as HCV NS3 protease inhibitors
UY32099A (en) 2008-09-11 2010-04-30 Enanta Pharm Inc HEPATITIS C SERINA PROTEASAS MACROCYCLIC INHIBITORS
JP5723783B2 (en) 2008-12-10 2015-05-27 アキリオン ファーマシューティカルズ,インコーポレーテッド New 4-amino-4-oxobutanoyl peptides as inhibitors of viral replication
US20100152103A1 (en) * 2008-12-10 2010-06-17 Achillion Pharmaceuticals, Inc. 4-amino-4-oxobutanoyl peptide cyclic analogues, inhibitors of viral replication
US8102720B2 (en) * 2009-02-02 2012-01-24 Qualcomm Incorporated System and method of pulse generation
WO2010101967A2 (en) 2009-03-04 2010-09-10 Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Phosphothiophene and phosphothiazole hcv polymerase inhibitors
CA2758072A1 (en) 2009-04-08 2010-10-14 Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Macrocyclic serine protease inhibitors
CA2761650C (en) 2009-05-13 2015-05-26 Enanta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Macrocyclic compounds as hepatitis c virus inhibitors
US8703700B2 (en) * 2009-05-22 2014-04-22 Sequoia Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Bimacrocylic HCV NS3 protease inhibitors
US8232246B2 (en) * 2009-06-30 2012-07-31 Abbott Laboratories Anti-viral compounds
WO2011014487A1 (en) 2009-07-30 2011-02-03 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. Hepatitis c virus ns3 protease inhibitors
TW201117812A (en) 2009-08-05 2011-06-01 Idenix Pharmaceuticals Inc Macrocyclic serine protease inhibitors
DK2477980T3 (en) * 2009-09-15 2016-09-12 Taigen Biotechnology Co Ltd HCV protease inhibitors
WO2011041551A1 (en) * 2009-10-01 2011-04-07 Intermune, Inc. Therapeutic antiviral peptides
WO2011049908A2 (en) * 2009-10-19 2011-04-28 Enanta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Bismacrokyclic compounds as hepatitis c virus inhibitors
US20110117055A1 (en) 2009-11-19 2011-05-19 Macdonald James E Methods of Treating Hepatitis C Virus with Oxoacetamide Compounds
MY159958A (en) 2009-12-18 2017-02-15 Idenix Pharmaceuticals Inc 5,5-fused arylene or heteroarylene hepatitis c virus inhibitors
US20110178107A1 (en) * 2010-01-20 2011-07-21 Taigen Biotechnology Co., Ltd. Hcv protease inhibitors
MX2012013127A (en) * 2010-05-13 2012-11-30 Amgen Inc Heteroaryloxyheterocyclyl compounds as pde10 inhibitors.
CA2801584A1 (en) 2010-06-07 2011-12-15 Abbvie Inc. Macrocyclic hepatitis c serine protease inhibitors
PT2618831E (en) * 2010-09-21 2016-03-04 Enanta Pharm Inc Macrocyclic proline derived hcv serine protease inhibitors
EA201390988A1 (en) 2010-12-30 2014-04-30 Энанта Фармасьютикалз, Инк. PHENANTRIDINE MACROCYCLIC INHIBITORS OF THE HYPATITIS C VIRUS SERIN PROTEASE
US8937041B2 (en) 2010-12-30 2015-01-20 Abbvie, Inc. Macrocyclic hepatitis C serine protease inhibitors
US9353100B2 (en) 2011-02-10 2016-05-31 Idenix Pharmaceuticals Llc Macrocyclic serine protease inhibitors, pharmaceutical compositions thereof, and their use for treating HCV infections
US20120252721A1 (en) 2011-03-31 2012-10-04 Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Methods for treating drug-resistant hepatitis c virus infection with a 5,5-fused arylene or heteroarylene hepatitis c virus inhibitor
US10201584B1 (en) 2011-05-17 2019-02-12 Abbvie Inc. Compositions and methods for treating HCV
JP6038179B2 (en) 2012-01-11 2016-12-07 アッヴィ・インコーポレイテッド Method for producing HCV protease inhibitor
MX2015004411A (en) 2012-10-08 2016-04-06 Abbvie Inc Compounds useful for making hcv protease inhibitors.
US11484534B2 (en) 2013-03-14 2022-11-01 Abbvie Inc. Methods for treating HCV
BR112015023343A2 (en) 2013-03-14 2017-07-18 Achillion Pharmaceuticals Inc method of preparing sovaprevir, method of preparing a compound of formula (c), method of preparing compound f-2, compound, process, method of preparing a pure amorphous form of sovaprevir, and crystalline form of sovaprevir
US9006423B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2015-04-14 Achillion Pharmaceuticals Inc. Process for making a 4-amino-4-oxobutanoyl peptide cyclic analogue, an inhibitor of viral replication, and intermediates thereof
JP2016513732A (en) 2013-03-15 2016-05-16 アキリオン ファーマシューティカルズ,インコーポレーテッド Sobaprevir polymorph and method for producing the same
WO2014145600A1 (en) 2013-03-15 2014-09-18 Achillion Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Ach-0142684 sodium salt polymorphs, composition including the same, and method of manufacture thereof
US20160229866A1 (en) 2013-09-20 2016-08-11 Idenix Pharmaceuticals Inc. Hepatitis c virus inhibitors
WO2015103490A1 (en) 2014-01-03 2015-07-09 Abbvie, Inc. Solid antiviral dosage forms
US20170135990A1 (en) 2014-03-05 2017-05-18 Idenix Pharmaceuticals Llc Pharmaceutical compositions comprising a 5,5-fused heteroarylene flaviviridae inhibitor and their use for treating or preventing flaviviridae infection
WO2015134560A1 (en) 2014-03-05 2015-09-11 Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Solid forms of a flaviviridae virus inhibitor compound and salts thereof

Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2000009543A2 (en) 1998-08-10 2000-02-24 Boehringer Ingelheim (Canada) Ltd. Hepatitis c inhibitor tri-peptides
WO2000059929A1 (en) 1999-04-06 2000-10-12 Boehringer Ingelheim (Canada) Ltd. Macrocyclic peptides active against the hepatitis c virus
WO2003053349A2 (en) 2001-12-20 2003-07-03 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Inhibitors of hepatitis c virus
US6608027B1 (en) 1999-04-06 2003-08-19 Boehringer Ingelheim (Canada) Ltd Macrocyclic peptides active against the hepatitis C virus
WO2004072243A2 (en) 2003-02-07 2004-08-26 Enanta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Macrocyclic hepatitis c serine protease inhibitors

Family Cites Families (52)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CA2215211A1 (en) 1995-03-31 1996-10-03 Takeda Chemical Industries, Ltd. Cysteine protease inhibitor
PT1003775E (en) 1997-08-11 2005-07-29 Boehringer Ingelheim Ca Ltd HEPATITIS C INHIBITING PEPTIDES
US6767991B1 (en) 1997-08-11 2004-07-27 Boehringer Ingelheim (Canada) Ltd. Hepatitis C inhibitor peptides
US20040058982A1 (en) 1999-02-17 2004-03-25 Bioavailability System, Llc Pharmaceutical compositions
CA2260499A1 (en) 1998-01-29 1999-07-29 Sumitomo Pharmaceuticals Company Limited Pharmaceutical compositions for the treatment of ischemic brain damage
AR022061A1 (en) 1998-08-10 2002-09-04 Boehringer Ingelheim Ca Ltd INHIBITING PEPTIDES OF HEPATITIS C, A PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITION CONTAINING THEM, THE USE OF THE SAME TO PREPARE A PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITION, THE USE OF AN INTERMEDIATE PRODUCT FOR THE PREPARATION OF THESE PEPTIDES AND A PROCEDURE FOR THE PREPARATION OF ANOGRAPH .
HUP0500456A3 (en) 2000-11-20 2012-05-02 Bristol Myers Squibb Co Hepatitis c tripeptide inhibitors, pharmaceutical compositions comprising thereof and their use
CA2369711A1 (en) 2002-01-30 2003-07-30 Boehringer Ingelheim (Canada) Ltd. Macrocyclic peptides active against the hepatitis c virus
US7119072B2 (en) 2002-01-30 2006-10-10 Boehringer Ingelheim (Canada) Ltd. Macrocyclic peptides active against the hepatitis C virus
CA2370396A1 (en) 2002-02-01 2003-08-01 Boehringer Ingelheim (Canada) Ltd. Hepatitis c inhibitor tri-peptides
US7091184B2 (en) 2002-02-01 2006-08-15 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Hepatitis C inhibitor tri-peptides
US6642204B2 (en) 2002-02-01 2003-11-04 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Hepatitis C inhibitor tri-peptides
CA2369970A1 (en) 2002-02-01 2003-08-01 Boehringer Ingelheim (Canada) Ltd. Hepatitis c inhibitor tri-peptides
US6828301B2 (en) 2002-02-07 2004-12-07 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Pharmaceutical compositions for hepatitis C viral protease inhibitors
EP1506172B1 (en) 2002-05-20 2011-03-30 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis c virus inhibitors
WO2003099316A1 (en) 2002-05-20 2003-12-04 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Heterocyclicsulfonamide hepatitis c virus inhibitors
AU2003301959A1 (en) 2002-05-20 2004-06-03 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Substituted cycloalkyl p1' hepatitis c virus inhibitors
US20060199773A1 (en) 2002-05-20 2006-09-07 Sausker Justin B Crystalline forms of (1R,2S)-N-[(1,1-dimethylethoxy)carbonyl]-3-methyl-L-valyl-(4R)-4-[(6-methoxy-1-isoquinolinyl)oxy]-L-prolyl-1-amino-N-(cyclopropylsulfonyl)-2-ethenyl-cyclopropanecarboxamide, monopotassium salt
MY140680A (en) 2002-05-20 2010-01-15 Bristol Myers Squibb Co Hepatitis c virus inhibitors
US20040138109A1 (en) 2002-09-30 2004-07-15 Boehringer Ingelheim Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Potent inhibitor of HCV serine protease
US20050075279A1 (en) 2002-10-25 2005-04-07 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Macrocyclic peptides active against the hepatitis C virus
US20050159345A1 (en) 2002-10-29 2005-07-21 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Composition for the treatment of infection by Flaviviridae viruses
US7601709B2 (en) 2003-02-07 2009-10-13 Enanta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Macrocyclic hepatitis C serine protease inhibitors
US20040180815A1 (en) 2003-03-07 2004-09-16 Suanne Nakajima Pyridazinonyl macrocyclic hepatitis C serine protease inhibitors
WO2004101605A1 (en) 2003-03-05 2004-11-25 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Hepatitis c inhibiting compounds
UY28240A1 (en) 2003-03-27 2004-11-08 Boehringer Ingelheim Pharma CRYSTAL PHASES OF A POWERFUL HCV INHIBITOR
EP1613353A1 (en) 2003-04-02 2006-01-11 Boehringer Ingelheim International GmbH Pharmaceutical compositions for hepatitis c viral protease inhibitors
JP4231524B2 (en) 2003-04-10 2009-03-04 ベーリンガー インゲルハイム インターナショナル ゲゼルシャフト ミット ベシュレンクテル ハフツング Process for producing macrocyclic compounds
CA2521835A1 (en) 2003-04-10 2004-10-21 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Process for the preparation of macrocyclic compounds by ruthenium complex catalysed metathesis reaction
TW200510391A (en) 2003-04-11 2005-03-16 Vertex Pharma Inhibitors of serine proteases, particularly HCV NS3-NS4A protease
ES2386161T3 (en) 2003-04-16 2012-08-10 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Process to separate a mixture of alkyl ester enantiomers using an enzyme
US7176208B2 (en) 2003-04-18 2007-02-13 Enanta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Quinoxalinyl macrocyclic hepatitis C serine protease inhibitors
CN103204903A (en) 2003-05-21 2013-07-17 贝林格尔.英格海姆国际有限公司 Hepatitis c inhibitor compounds
WO2004113365A2 (en) 2003-06-05 2004-12-29 Enanta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Hepatitis c serine protease tri-peptide inhibitors
UY28525A1 (en) 2003-09-22 2005-04-29 Boehringer Ingelheim Int ACTIVE MACROCICLIC PEPTIDES AGAINST HEPATITIS C VIRUSES
BRPI0414814A (en) 2003-09-26 2006-11-14 Schering Corp macrocyclic hepatitis c virus serine ns3 protease inhibitors
EP1692157B1 (en) 2003-10-10 2013-04-17 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Inhibitors of serine proteases, particularly hcv ns3-ns4a protease
RS54573B1 (en) 2003-10-14 2016-06-30 F. Hoffmann-La Roche Ltd Macrocyclic carboxylic acids and acylsulfonamides as inhibitors of hcv replication
US7491794B2 (en) 2003-10-14 2009-02-17 Intermune, Inc. Macrocyclic compounds as inhibitors of viral replication
US7135462B2 (en) 2003-11-20 2006-11-14 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors
MXPA06005683A (en) 2003-11-20 2006-12-14 Schering Corp Depeptidized inhibitors of hepatitis c virus ns3 protease.
US7109344B2 (en) 2003-12-04 2006-09-19 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Ruthenium catalyst
EP1543875A1 (en) 2003-12-04 2005-06-22 Boehringer Ingelheim Pharma GmbH & Co. KG Novel metathesis ruthenium catalyst
WO2005070955A1 (en) 2004-01-21 2005-08-04 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Macrocyclic peptides active against the hepatitis c virus
MXPA06010389A (en) 2004-03-15 2007-01-19 Boehringer Ingelheim Int Process for preparing macrocyclic dipeptides which are suitable for the treatment of hepatitis c viral infections.
US7514557B2 (en) 2004-05-25 2009-04-07 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Process for preparing acyclic HCV protease inhibitors
DE102004033312A1 (en) 2004-07-08 2006-01-26 Boehringer Ingelheim Pharma Gmbh & Co. Kg Continuous metathesis process with ruthenium catalysts
BRPI0513426A (en) 2004-07-16 2007-11-27 Gilead Sciences Inc Amino Acid Preparation Process Useful in the Preparation of Peptide Receptor Modulators
UY29016A1 (en) 2004-07-20 2006-02-24 Boehringer Ingelheim Int ANALOGS OF INHIBITING DIPEPTIDES OF HEPATITIS C
CN101068828A (en) 2004-08-27 2007-11-07 先灵公司 Acylsulfonamide compounds as inhibitors of hepatitis c virus NS3 serine protease
WO2006033851A1 (en) 2004-09-17 2006-03-30 Boehringer Ingelheim International, Gmbh Ring-closing metathesis process in supercritical fluid
US7323447B2 (en) 2005-02-08 2008-01-29 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hepatitis C virus inhibitors

Patent Citations (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2000009543A2 (en) 1998-08-10 2000-02-24 Boehringer Ingelheim (Canada) Ltd. Hepatitis c inhibitor tri-peptides
US6329379B1 (en) 1998-08-10 2001-12-11 Boehringer Ingelheim (Canada) Ltd. Hepatitis C inhibitor tri-peptides
US20020037998A1 (en) 1998-08-10 2002-03-28 Montse Llinas-Brunet Hepatitis C inhibitor tri-peptides
WO2000059929A1 (en) 1999-04-06 2000-10-12 Boehringer Ingelheim (Canada) Ltd. Macrocyclic peptides active against the hepatitis c virus
US6608027B1 (en) 1999-04-06 2003-08-19 Boehringer Ingelheim (Canada) Ltd Macrocyclic peptides active against the hepatitis C virus
WO2003053349A2 (en) 2001-12-20 2003-07-03 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Inhibitors of hepatitis c virus
WO2004072243A2 (en) 2003-02-07 2004-08-26 Enanta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Macrocyclic hepatitis c serine protease inhibitors

Non-Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
A. Spatola, "Peptide Backbone Modifications: A Structure-Activity Analysis of Peptides Containing Amide Bond Surrogates, Conformational Constraints, and Rela," Department of Chemistry, University of Louisville, Louisville Kentucky, pp. 267-357, XP 002032461.
M. Llinás-Burnet et al., "Peptide-Based Inhibitors of the Hepatitis C Virus Serine Protease," Bioorganic & Medicinal Chemistry Letters 8, (1998), pp. 1713-1718.

Cited By (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20080008681A1 (en) * 2006-06-26 2008-01-10 Deqiang Niu Macrocyclic hepatitis c virus serine protease inhibitors
US8501681B2 (en) 2006-06-26 2013-08-06 Enanta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Macrocyclic hepatitis C virus serine protease inhibitors
US20090005387A1 (en) * 2007-06-26 2009-01-01 Deqiang Niu Quinoxalinyl macrocyclic hepatitis c virus serine protease inhibitors
US9296782B2 (en) 2012-07-03 2016-03-29 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Inhibitors of hepatitis C virus
US10335409B2 (en) 2012-07-03 2019-07-02 Gilead Pharmasset Llc Inhibitors of hepatitis C virus
US10603318B2 (en) 2012-07-03 2020-03-31 Gilead Pharmasset Llc Inhibitors of hepatitis C virus
US9617310B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2017-04-11 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Inhibitors of hepatitis C virus

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
US20100015092A1 (en) 2010-01-21
US20080152622A1 (en) 2008-06-26
US8236807B2 (en) 2012-08-07
US20070060510A1 (en) 2007-03-15
US7566719B2 (en) 2009-07-28
US20040266668A1 (en) 2004-12-30
US7368452B2 (en) 2008-05-06
US7176208B2 (en) 2007-02-13

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
USRE42375E1 (en) Quinoxalinyl macrocyclic hepatitis C serine protease inhibitors
EP2143727B1 (en) Quinoxalinyl macrocyclic hepatitis C serine protease inhibitors
US7605126B2 (en) Acylaminoheteroaryl hepatitis C virus protease inhibitors
US8809264B2 (en) Quinoxalinyl macrocyclic hepatitis C virus serine protease inhibitors
US8951998B2 (en) Quinoxaline-containing compounds as hepatitis C virus inhibitors
US7910587B2 (en) Quinoxalinyl dipeptide hepatitis C virus inhibitors
US8377872B2 (en) Cyclic P3 tripeptide hepatitis C serine protease inhibitors
US8361958B2 (en) Oximyl HCV serine protease inhibitors
US20080287449A1 (en) Aza-tripeptide hepatitis c serine protease inhibitors
US20080274080A1 (en) Aza-peptide macrocyclic hepatitis c serine protease inhibitors
US20040180815A1 (en) Pyridazinonyl macrocyclic hepatitis C serine protease inhibitors
US20080279821A1 (en) Arylpiperidinyl and arylpyrrolidinyl macrocyclic hepatitis c serine protease inhibitors
US20050065073A1 (en) Aza-peptide macrocyclic hepatitis C serine protease inhibitors
US20080038225A1 (en) Triazolyl acyclic hepatitis c serine protease inhibitors
US20080274082A1 (en) Oximyl hydroxyamic analogs as hepatitis c virus protease inhibitor
US20090123423A1 (en) Hydroxyamic analogs as hepatitis c virus serine protease inhibitor
US20080317712A1 (en) Arylpiperidinyl and arylpyrrolidinyl tripeptide hepatitis c serine protease inhibitors

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
FPAY Fee payment

Year of fee payment: 8

MAFP Maintenance fee payment

Free format text: PAYMENT OF MAINTENANCE FEE, 12TH YEAR, LARGE ENTITY (ORIGINAL EVENT CODE: M1553)

Year of fee payment: 12